One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff
is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Honda Fit was a wise investment.
It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Introduction
i
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１５：４４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０００２
2008 Fit
Main Menu
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
Introduction
WARNING:
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component.
ii
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１５：４８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０００３
2008 Fit
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
These signal words mean:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
on the vehicle.
Instructions
Safety Section
Safety Headings
Safety Messages
Safety Labels
AFewWordsAboutSafety
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
iii
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１５：５８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０００４
2008 Fit
Main Menu
2008 Fit Online Reference Owner's Manual
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................... 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .................................................... 5
Instruments and Controls
(indicators, gauges, dashboard, steering wheel, and other convenience items)
............. 57
Features (climate control, audio, security, and cruise control) .................................................................. 101
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ...................................................................... 135
Driving (engine and transmission operation) ................................................................................................ 151
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)........................................... 177
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses) ..................................... 217
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ....................................... 241
Warranty and Customer Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ... 257
Authorized Manuals (U. S. only) (how to order) ......................................................................................... 261
Index ............................................................................................................................... ........................................ I
Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)
1
31SAA610
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
How to operate the heating and air
conditioning system, the audio
system, and other convenience
features.
What gasoline to use, how to break-
in your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park.
The maintenance minder shows you
when you need to take your vehicle
to the dealer for maintenance service.
There is also a list of things to check
and instructions on how to check
them.
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.
ID numbers, dimensions, capaci-
ties, and technical information.
Overview of Contents
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Driver and Passenger Safety
Instruments and Controls
Features
Driving
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
Index
Before Driving
Service Information Summary
Maintenance
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Technical Information
2
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１６：２６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０００７
2008 Fit
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊ : If equipped
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
A/T model is shown.
AUDIO SYSTEM
GAUGES
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
PASSENGER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
PARKING BRAKE
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(P.9, 25)
MIRROR CONTROLS
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.31)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.9, 31)
(P.60)
(P.67)
(P.79)
(P.94)
(P.138)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
(P.99)
(P.96)
(P.157)
(P.155)
(P.102)
(P.107)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.74)
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P.95)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCH
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１６：３３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０００８
2008 Fit
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped.
1:
2:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
HORN
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.31)
PADDLE SHIFTER
(DOWNSHIFT)
PADDLE SHIFTER
(UPSHIFT)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/
FOG LIGHTS
(P.162)
(P.72)
(P.95)
(P.138)
(P.75)
(P.131) (P.127)
(P.99)
(P.74)
(P.71)
(P.74)
(P.162)
(P.74)
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１６：４０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０００９
2008 Fit
Main Menu
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
...........................................Airbags . 9
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 13
5. Fasten and Position the
.............................Seat Belts . 14
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 15
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16
...Additional Safety Precautions . 17
Additional Information About
.......................Your Seat Belts . 18
..Seat Belt System Components . 18
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 20
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 20
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 22
......Airbag System Components . 22
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 25
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28
How Your Side Curtain
..........................Airbags Work . 30
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 31
How the Passenger Airbag
...............Off Indicator Works . 31
.............................Airbag Service . 32
...Additional Safety Precautions . 33
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines . 34
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 34
All Children Should Sit in a
.................................Back Seat . 35
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 35
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 37
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 37
...Additional Safety Precautions . 38
Protecting Infants and Small
...................................Children . 39
.......................Protecting Infants . 39
.........Protecting Small Children . 40
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 41
....................Installing a Child Seat . 42
...............................With LATCH . 43
.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 45
..............................With a Tether . 47
...........Protecting Larger Children . 49
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 49
..................Using a Booster Seat . 50
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
.........................................Front . 51
...Additional Safety Precautions . 52
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 53
...................................Safety Labels . 54
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１６：４４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００１０
2008 Fit
Main Menu
−
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
smallchildrenshouldberestrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages ).
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).
14
5234
179
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Don’t Drink and Drive
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Restrain All Children
Control Your Speed
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
6
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１６：５４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００１１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passengers.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
(5)
(7)
(10)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(8)
(6)
(2)
(9)
(11)
(4)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(11) Door Locks
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１７：０１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００１２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
What You Should Do:
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１７：１２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００１３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how
your front airbags work).
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact (see page
for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
28
25 30
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１７：２０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００１４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
What you should do:
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
10
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１７：２６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００１５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
See pages for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and the
tailgate are closed and locked.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
See page for how to lock the
doors, and page for how the door
and tailgate open indicator works.
Your vehicle has a door and
tailgate open indicator on
the instrument panel to indicate
when any door or the tailgate is not
tightly closed.
Locking the doors and the tailgate
also helps prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door or the
tailgate when you come to a stop.
34 38
62
79
CONTINUED
Close and Lock the Doors Adjust the Front SeatsIntroduction 1. 2.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１７：３６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００１６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down (see
page ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
75
86
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
Protecting Adults and Teens
12
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１７：４４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００１７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, make
sure the center head restraint is
properly positioned.
87 87
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１７：５２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００１８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
The seat belt in the center position
of the back seat can be unlatched
and retracted to allow the back seat
to be folded up or down. This seat
belt should be latched whenever the
seat-back is in an upright position.
See page for how to unlatch and
relatch the seat belt.
93
Protecting Adults and Teens
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
14
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１８：００ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００１９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, squeeze the two release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
18
Protecting Adults and Teens
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
RELEASE BUTTONS
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１８：０８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００２０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Advice for Pregnant Women
16
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１８：１４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００２１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
thebeltandincreasethechanceof
serious injury in a crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
If they do, they could be
very seriously injured in a crash.
A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Adults and Teens
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Never let passengers ride in the
area in front of a folded-up rear
seat or on top of a f olded-down
rear seat.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door.
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１８：２２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００２２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages and ).
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
27 28
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
18
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１８：３１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００２３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page ).
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
The lap/shoulder belt in the center
seating position on the rear seat is
equipped with a detachable seat belt
that has two parts: a small latch plate
and an anchor buckle.
The detachable seat belt should
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page .
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
14
45
93
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Lap/Shoulder Belt
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１８：４０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００２４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy.
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag
deploys during a side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle
will also deploy.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your
booklet for
details.
203
do not deploy
Honda
Warranty Information
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners Seat Belt Maintenance
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
20
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１８：４９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００２５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by your dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１８：５３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００２６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Airbag System Components
Additional Information About Your Airbags
22
(8)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(13)
(7)
(5)
(4)
(6)
(10)
(12)
(9)
(11)
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(12) Outer Lap Tensioners
(13) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１８：５８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００２７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your airbag system includes:
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
25
28
30
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
(15)
(15)
(14)
(16)
(16)
(14) Side Curtain Airbags
(15) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１９：０５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００２８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front
passenger’s seat belt are latched
or unlatched (see page ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
27
31
31
20
29
27
30
18
Additional Information About Your Airbags
24
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１９：１４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００２９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page ).
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
27
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１９：２３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００３０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
If the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will deploy at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Dual-Threshold Airbags
not latched
Dual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
latched
26
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１９：３１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００３１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１９：４１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００３２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page ).
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the affected side.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against the folded
rear seat.
If your vehicle has optional floor
mats,makesurethematbehindthe
front passenger’s seat is hooked to
thefloormatanchor(seepage ).
If it is not, the mat may interfere
with the proper operation of the
sensors and operation of the seat.
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly,
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
31
203
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Airbags Work
do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
28
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１９：４９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００３３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the
position sensors detect a child has
leaned into the side airbag’s
deployment path, the airbag will shut
off.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
31
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１９：５７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００３４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
How the SRS Indicator Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
30
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２０：０６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００３５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them. This indicator
alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
off(seepage ).Ifitdoesn’tcome
on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detectabout65lbs(29kg)orless
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does there is a problem
with the airbag.
61
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not
not mean
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２０：１５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００３６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
maycomeonandoffrepeatedlyif
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s), such as a folded-
down back seat, that are touching
the rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag Service
An airbag ever inflates.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
32
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２０：２５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００３７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
If water or
another liquid soaks into a seat-
back, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during a crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid.
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
Additional Safety Precautions
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２０：３１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００３８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children aged 12 and
under.
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to protect child
passengers.
39 48
49 52
properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
34
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２０：３９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００３９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
CONTINUED
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page for important
information about protecting larger
children).
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page ),
please follow these guidelines:Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and
Transport Canada recommend that
all children aged 12 and under be
properly restrained in a back seat.
Some states have laws restricting
where children may ride.
31
49
Protecting Children General Guidelines
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Small Children
Placing a f orward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２０：４８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００４０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
36
DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
SUN VISORS
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２１：０１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００４１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
15
14
49
86
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２１：０９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００４２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the tailgate,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
If a child wraps a loose
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages and for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
This can prevent
children from accidentally falling
out (see page ).
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
45 46
80
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Lock all doors and the tailgate
when your vehicle is not in use.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked.
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Additional Safety Precautions
38
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２１：１７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００４３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
CONTINUED
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Child Seat Type
Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
Protecting Infants
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２１：２７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００４４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
If the vehicle seat is too
farforward,orthechild’sheadis
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Child Seat Placement
Placing a f orward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous.
40
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２１：３５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００４５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
31
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
1.
2.
3.
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２１：４５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００４６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
canbeseriouslyinjuredinacrash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
facing child seats.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
Secure the child in the child seat.
1.
2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat
42
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２１：５２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００４７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the outer rear seats.
Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
LOWER ANCHORS
Rigid type
BUTTON
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２２：０１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００４８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
Route the tether strap over the
seat-back and through the head
restraint legs.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
Pushandpullthechildseat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
5.
4. 6.
7.
8.
Installing a Child Seat
44
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Flexible type
ANCHOR
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２２：０９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００４９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in
the center seating position of the
rear seat, remove its head restraint,
and make sure the detachable seat
belt is securely latched (see page
).
2.1.
3.
93
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２２：１７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００５０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To deactivate the lockable retractor
andremoveachildseat,unlatchthe
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
4. 5.
Installing a Child Seat
46
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２２：２２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００５１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat.
Each rear outside seating position
has an anchorage point on the seat-
back, and the center seating position
has an anchorage point in the ceiling
near the tailgate.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), route the
tether strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the tether
strap is not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
1.
3.
2.
45
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Installing a Child Seat
Using an Outer Anchor
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２２：３１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００５２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Route the tether strap over the
seat-back, then attach the tether
strap hook to the anchor, making
sure the tether strap is not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), open the
anchor cover.
Remove the rear center head
restraint, and store it in a safe
place.
1.
2.
3.
4.45
Using the Center Anchor
Installing a Child Seat
48
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
COVER
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２２：３８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００５３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Protecting Larger Children
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２２：４６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００５４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
3.
4.
5.
35
Protecting Larger Children
Using a Booster Seat
50
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２２：５４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００５５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
14 49
CONTINUED
Protecting Larger Children
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
Physical Size
Maturity
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２３：０２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００５６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Supervise the child. Even a mature
child sometimes needs to be
reminded to fasten the seat belt or
sit properly.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Larger Children
52
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２３：１１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００５７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
With the tailgate open, airflow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
tailgate open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system as shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２３：１９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００５８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
U.S. models only
Canadian models
U.S. models
Safety Labels
54
DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２３：３１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００５９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Canadian modelsU.S. models
U.S. models
Canadian models
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
HOOD
RADIATOR CAP
DOORJAMBS
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２３：４５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００６０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
56
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２３：４７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００６１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 58
............................Instrument Panel . 59
..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 60
.............................................Gauges . 67
...................................Trip Meter . 67
.....................................Odometer . 68
..................................Fuel Gauge . 68
..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 68
..................Maintenance Minder . 69
Controls Near the Steering
...........................................Wheel . 70
.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 71
.........Turn Signals and Headlights . 72
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 74
.................Hazard Warning Button . 74
.................Rear Window Defogger . 74
..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 75
...............................Keys and Locks . 76
........................Immobilizer System . 77
................................Ignition Switch . 78
......................................Door Locks . 79
......................Power Door Locks . 79
..............Childproof Door Locks . 80
............................................Tailgate . 81
.......................Remote Transmitter . 83
.................................................Seats . 86
..............................Power Windows . 94
.............................................Mirrors . 95
.................................Parking Brake . 96
...........Interior Convenience Items . 97
.......................Beverage Holders . 98
....................................Glove Box . 98
...........Accessory Power Socket . 99
......................................Sun Visor . 99
.................................Interior Lights . 99
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
57
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２３：５１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００６２
2008 Fit
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊ : If equipped
Control Locations
58
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.95)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCH
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
POWER DOOR
LOCK MASTER
SWITCH
(P.79)
(P.94)
(P.138)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
GAUGES
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
(P.60)
(P.67)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(P.157)
(P.155)
AUDIO SYSTEM
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.102)
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE
(P.31) (P.99)
(P.96)
(P.107)
(P.74)
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２３：５７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００６３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
: If equipped
Instrument Panel
Instruments and Controls
59
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
(P.64)
LIGHTS ON
INDICATOR
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LIGHTS
INDICATOR
DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
(P.66)
LOW TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
(P.63)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.62)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.30, 61)
HIGH TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
(P.63)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.66)
(P.64)
(P.62)LOW FUEL INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.64)
(P.62)
(P.66)
WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR (P.65)
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR
(P.65)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
(P.31, 61)
CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR
(P.65)
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
(P.65)
ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING INDICATOR
(P.62)
TPMS INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR
(P.64)
(P.18, 60)
(P.60, 232)
(P.231)
(P.60, 230)
(P.60, 230)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.65)
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２４：０５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００６４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The instrument panel has many
indicators that give you important
information about your vehicle.
See page .
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page .
This indicator has two functions:
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If it remains on after you have
fully released the parking brake
while the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page .
2.
1.231
230
230
232
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
IndicatorParking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
Instrument Panel Indicators
60
U.S. Canada
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２４：１５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００６５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
cutoff system, side curtain airbags,
automatic seat belt tensioners,
driver’s seat position sensor, or the
front passenger’s weight sensors.
For more information, see page .
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page .
18
31
30
Instrument Panel Indicators
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator Side Airbag Off
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
61
CanadaU.S.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２４：２３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００６６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition to the ON
(II) position and goes off after the
engine starts. If it comes on at any
other time, there is a problem in the
electric power steering system. If
this happens, stop the vehicle in a
safe place and turn off the engine.
Reset the system by restarting the
engine. The indicator will not turn
off immediately. If it does not go off
after driving a short distance, or
comes on again while driving, take
the vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. With the indicator on, the
EPS may be turned off, making the
vehicle harder to steer.
If the power steering system
overheats while driving, the assist is
reduced and steering may feel
slightly harder.
Driving with the power steering
system continuously overheating can
cause system damage.
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
When the indicator comes on, there
is about 1.7 US gal (6.3
)offuel
remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle does reach E.
This indicator comes on if any door
or the tailgate is not closed tightly.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no
anti-lock function. For more
information, see page .168
Instrument Panel Indicators
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
Door and Tailgate Open
Indicator
62
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２４：３２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００６７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator monitors the
temperature of the engine coolant. It
normallycomesonwhenyouturn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and goes off after a few
seconds. In normal driving
conditions, this indicator should not
blink or stay on. In severe driving
conditions, such as very hot weather
or a long period of uphill driving, this
indicator may blink. This means the
engine coolant temperature is high.
If the indicator begins to blink while
you are driving, be sure to slow down
to prevent overheating. If the
indicator stays on, pull safely to the
side of the road and turn off the
engine. See page for instructions
and precautions on checking the
engine’s cooling system.
This indicator monitors the
temperature of the engine coolant. If
there is no problem, this indicator
comes on when the engine is cold. If
it comes on when the engine is warm
(normal operating temperature),
have the vehicle inspected by your
dealer as soon as possible.
Do not drive the vehicle while the
indicator is on or the engine may be
damaged.
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see page ). Replace
the bulb as soon as possible, since
other drivers cannot see that you are
signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
228
198
Instrument Panel Indicators
High Temperature
Indicator
Low Temperature
Indicator
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Instruments and Controls
63
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２４：４０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００６８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will stay on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page .
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page ). For more
information, see page .
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
170
73
218
238
U.S. models only U.S. models only
On Sport model
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Lights On Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
64
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２４：４９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００６９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the daytime running lights
(DRL) are on (see page ).
If this indicator comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position and the parking brake is
released, it means there is a problem
in the circuit. Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer.
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button (see
page ).
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the
cruise control.
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluidwhenyouseethisindicator
come on (see page ).
73
73
131
131
192
Canadian models only
Canadian models onlyOn Sport model and Canadian LX model
On Sport model and Canadian LX model
High Beam Indicator
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator
Cruise Main Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
65
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２５：００ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００７０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It
remindsyouthatitistimetotake
your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance. The maintenance main
items and sub items will be displayed
in the information display. See page
for more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It will
gooffifyouhaveinserteda
properly-coded ignition key. If it is
not a properly-coded key, the
indicator will blink and the engine
will not start (see page ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position. This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
for more information on the
security system.
130
77
179
On Sport model
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Security System Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
66
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２５：０９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００７１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the select/reset
knob repeatedly.
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the last
selection is displayed.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the select/reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
Trip Meter
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
67
FUEL GAUGE
U.S. model is shown.
TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER
ODOMETER
TRIP METER
INFORMATION DISPLAY
SELECT/RESET KNOB
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２５：１７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００７２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
If your fuel fill cap is loose or
missing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’
messageappearsastextonthe
information display after you start
the engine. The message appears
from CHECK to FUEL, then to CAP
repeatedly.
If the system still detects a loose or
missing fuel fill cap, the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) comes on.
Turn the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL goes
out after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If it does not go out, have
your dealer inspect the vehicle. For
more information, see page .
Turn the engine off and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
the cap, then retighten it until it
clicks at least once. You can cycle
the message off of the display by
pressing the select/reset knob
repeatedly, but this message will be
displayed each time the engine is
started. It will take several days of
normal driving for the vehicle to turn
the warning off.
231
Odometer
Fuel Gauge
Check Fuel Cap Indicator
Gauges
68
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２５：２４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００７３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued trouble-
free driving. Refer to page for
more information.
179
Maintenance Minder
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
69
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２５：２８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００７４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊ ＊
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped.
1:
2:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
70
HORN
MIRROR CONTROLS
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P.31)
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/
FOG LIGHTS
(P.72)
(P.95)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.138)
(P.99)
(P.71)
(P.74)
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
(P.74)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKSTEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
PADDLE SHIFTER (DOWNSHIFT) PADDLE SHIFTER (UPSHIFT)INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P.75) (P.131)
(P.127)
(P.162)
(P.74)
(P.162)
1
2
2
2
2
2 2
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２５：３５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００７５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
The wipers are not activated.
The wipers operate every
few seconds.
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
andholdit.Thewashersspray
until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete one more sweep after
you release the lever.
MIST
OFF
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Windshield washers
OFF
When you turn the wiper switch to
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will
return to its parked position.
Rotate the switch clockwise to
turn the rear window wiper ON.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Windshield Wiper Rear Window Wiper and WasherMIST
OFF
INT
LO
HI
Windshield Washers
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Instruments and Controls
71
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２５：４６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００７６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−Hold past ON to turn the rear
window wiper on and to spray the
rear window washer.
Rotate the switch
counterclockwise to spray the
window washer.
Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever and
hold it. The lever will return to the
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
Therearwindowwasherusesthe
same fluid reservoir as the wind-
shield washer.
Turn signal
Off
Parking and interior lights
Headlights
High beams
Flashhighbeams
Fog lights off
Fog lights on
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
On Sport model
Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal
Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights
72
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２５：５３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００７７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−Turning the switch to
the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, side-marker lights, and
rear license plate lights.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights.
When the light switch is in the
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. This indicator stays on if
you leave the light switch on and
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position.
If you leave the lights on with the
key removed from the ignition
switch, you will hear a reminder
chime when you open the driver’s
door.
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
They will go off when the headlights
are turned off.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
With the headlight switch off or in
the position, the high beam
headlights and the high beam
indicator come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
Push the lever
forward and the high beam indicator
will come on (see page ). Pull it
back to return to low beams.
65
Canadian models only
On Sport model
Headlights Daytime Running Lights
Fog Lights
High Beams
Headlights
Instruments and Controls
73
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２６：０２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００７８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Pushthebuttontoturnonthe
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both turn
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
You can change the instrument panel
brightness only when the light
switch is on.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog,frost,andthinicefromthe
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. You must manually
shut off the rear window defogger
when it is no longer needed.
Turntheknobontheupperpartof
the instrument panel to adjust the
brightness.
You will hear a beep when maximum
or minimum brightness is reached.
You will also hear a beep when the
maximum level is canceled by
turning the knob a click to the left.
Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning ButtonInstrument Panel Brightness
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
74
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL KNOB
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２６：１０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００７９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
Thedefoggerwiresontheinsideof
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
Move the steering wheel so it
points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Rear Window Defogger, Steering Wheel Adjustment
Instruments and Controls
75
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２６：１９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００８０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
Your vehicle comes with the two
ignition keys.
On Sport model All models except Sport
All models except Sport
Keys and Locks
76
KEY NUMBER TAG
KEY NUMBER TAG
KEYS WITH
TRANSMITTER
KEYS
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２６：２７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００８１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on for
a few seconds, then go off. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the
system does not recognize the
coding of the key. Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position,
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
If you have lost your key and cannot
start the engine, contact your dealer.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Immobilizer System
Instruments and Controls
77
Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２６：３５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００８２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, push it in slightly. If
your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must
also be in park.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or
the ACCESSORY (I) position and
open the driver’s door. Remove the
key to turn off the beeper.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must be
in Park before you can remove the
key from the ignition switch.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power socket in this
position.
LOCK (0)
ON (II)
START (III)
ACCESSORY (I)
Ignition Switch
78
Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２６：４３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００８３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To lock the doors and the tailgate,
push the top of the master door lock
switch on the driver’s door, push in
the lock tab on the driver’s door, or
usethekeyintheoutsidedoorlock
on the driver’s door.
Pushing the bottom of the master
door lock switch unlocks all doors
and the tailgate.
Each door has a lock tab on the top
of the door. Push in the tab to lock
the door, and pull it out to unlock.
To lock the passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, push in the
lock tab and close the door. To lock
the driver’s door, pull and hold the
outside door handle, then push in the
lock tab. Release the handle, then
close the door.
Each front door can be locked or
unlocked with the ignition key.
CONTINUED
On Canadian DX model
All models except Sport
All models except Canadian DX
Power Door Locks
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
79
TAB
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
LOCK
UNLOCK
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２６：５１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００８４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The lock tab on each passenger’s
door locks and unlocks only that
door. Pulling up the driver’s lock tab
only unlocks the driver’s door. To
unlock only the driver’s door from
the outside, turn the key and release
it. If you turn it again, the remaining
doors and the tailgate unlock.
To lock a passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, push in the
lock tab and close the door. To lock
the driver’s door, remove key from
ignition switch and push in the lock
tab or push the top of the master
door lock switch, then close the door.
With the driver’s door open and the
key in the ignition switch, the master
door lock switch is disabled. It is not
disabled if the driver’s door is closed.
If you try to lock the open driver’s
door with the key in the ignition
switch by pushing in the lock tab, the
tabs on all doors pop up when you
close the door.
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up, and use the outside door
handle.
Lockout Prevention
Childproof Door Locks
Door Locks
80
Lock
Unlock
LEVER
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２６：５８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００８５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The tailgate will lock or unlock when
you lock or unlock the driver’s door
by using the key, the lock tab on the
driver’s door, the master door lock
switch or the remote transmitter (if
equipped).
To open the tailgate, pull the handle,
then lift up.You can lock or unlock the tailgate
with the key.
CONTINUED
All models except Sport
All models except Canadian DX
Tailgate
Instruments and Controls
81
KEY
HANDLE
UNLOCK
LOCK
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２７：０４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００８６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To close the tailgate, hold the
tailgate handle, lower the tailgate,
then press down on the back edge.
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
on page
.
If the power door lock system cannot
unlock the tailgate, unlock it
manually.
Push the release lever to the right as
shown.
If you need to unlock the tailgate
manually, it means there is a
problem with the tailgate. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
Place a cloth on the edge of the
cover, then use a small flat-tipped
screwdriver to remove the cover on
the back of the tailgate.53
On Sport model
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Unlocking the Tailgate
Tailgate
82
TAILGATE
HANDLE
Unlock
Lock
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２７：１２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００８７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
−
Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the remaining doors
and the tailgate. Some exterior lights
will flash twice each time you press
the button.
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the door activated
position) will come on when you
press the UNLOCK button. If you do
not open any door or the tailgate
within 30 seconds, the light fades out.
If you relock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter
before 30 seconds have elapsed, the
light will go off immediately.
If you do not open any door or the
tailgate within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock and the security
system will set.
Pressthisbuttonfor
about 2 seconds to attract attention:
the horn will sound, and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
Press this button once to
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some
exterior lights will flash once. When
you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, the horn will sound to
verify that the doors and the tailgate
arelockedandthesecuritysystem
has set. You cannot lock the doors
and the tailgate if any door or the
tailgate is not fully closed or the key
is in the ignition switch.
CONTINUED
On Sport model
UNLOCK PANIC
LOCK
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
83
LED
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２７：１９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００８８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery
as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR1616
To replace the battery:
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
1.
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
Remote Transmitter
84
SCREW
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２７：２７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００８９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Remove the old battery, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the side facing down.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
Install the parts in reverse order.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
5.
4.
2.
3.
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
85
TAB
BATTERY
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２７：３５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００９０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
11 13
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
The seat can also be adjusted
forward and backward using the
lever on the side of the seat-back.
Pull out the lever and push it forward,
holding the seat-back with your hand.
Move the seat to the desired position,
andchecktheseattomakesureitis
locked in position.
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the lever under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
releasethelever.Trytomovethe
seat to make sure it is locked in
position.
FrontSeatAdjustments
Seats
86
LEVER
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２７：４２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００９１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
See page for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
13
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
You can adjust the angle of the rear
seat-backs separately. To change the
seat-back angle, pull up the release
leverontheoutersideoftheseat-
back.
CONTINUED
Head RestraintsRear Seat Adjustments
Seats
Instruments and Controls
87
LEVER
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２７：５０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００９２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The head restraints in the rear outer
seating positions do not adjust for
height. To remove one for cleaning
or repair, push the release button,
and lift the restraint up.
The front head restraints adjust for
height. You need both hands to
adjust a restraint. Do not attempt to
adjust it while driving. To raise it,
pull upward. To lower the restraint,
push the release button sideways,
and push the restraint down.
Theyaremosteffectivewhenyou
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Seats
88
RELEASE
BUTTON
FRONT
Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２７：５５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００９３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Remove the front head restraints
(see page ), and store them
securely.
You can recline the seat-backs on the
front seats so they are level with the
rear seat cushions, making a large
cushioned area. To do this:
Recline the rear seat-backs as far
backward as possible (see page
).
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, make
sure the center head restraint is
properly positioned.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
1.
2.
87
88
CONTINUED
Reclining the Front Seats
Seats
Instruments and Controls
89
SLIDE LEVER
SEAT-BACK ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
REAR CENTER
RELEASE BUTTON
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２８：０３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００９４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Pull up the rear seat cushion, and
fold the seat leg down. Push the seat
cushion firmly against the seat-back
to lock it.
The left and right rear seat cushions
can be lifted up separately to make
room for cargo.
Remove any items from the seat
beforeyoufolduptheseatcushion.
Pull up the seat-back angle
adjustment lever, and pivot the
seat-back backward until it is level
with the rear seat cushion.
Using the slide lever, move the
frontseatcushionsasfarforward
as possible.
Reverse this procedure to return the
front seats to the upright position.
When you return the seat-back to its
upright position, hold the seat-back
to keep it from going up too quickly.
Make sure you install the head
restraints and securely lock the seats
before driving.
3.
4.
Seats
Folding the Rear Seat Up
90
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２８：１１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００９５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Whenyoufolddownthedriver’sside
rear seat, use the latch plate to
release the center seat belt from the
detachable anchor (see page ).
Allow the seat belt to retract into the
holder on the ceiling, and store the
buckles in it.
Move the front seat cushions as
far forward as possible.
The rear seat-backs can be folded
down for more cargo room.
Each side folds down separately, so
you can still carry a passenger in the
rear outer seating position.
Remove any items from the seat
before folding down the seat-back.
Make sure there are no items on the
floor before folding down the seats.
To return the seat cushion to its
original position, first make sure
there are no items on the floor, then
pull up the seat leg fully, and push
down the seat cushion slowly while
holding it with your hands. Set the
seat leg in the floor guide. A latch
comes out when the leg is set
properly. 1.
93
CONTINUED
Folding the Rear Seat Down
Seats
Instruments and Controls
91
LATCH PLATE
FLOOR GUIDE LATCH
LEG
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２８：２０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００９６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See
on page ).
To return the seat-back to its upright
position, move the front seat forward
again, then lift up the seat-back.
While lifting the seat-back, the seat
cushion may come up with it. To
secure the seat cushion, see page .
Make sure the seat-back and seat
cushion are locked securely and all
rear shoulder belts are positioned in
front of the rear seat-backs. In the
center seating position of the rear
seat, be sure the detachable anchor
is latched securely before using the
seat belt (see page ).
Move the front seat backward to
the desired position. Make sure
theseatislockedinplace.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded down.
Make sure that the folded down rear
seat does not interfere with the front
passenger’s seat-back. This will
cause the front passenger’s weight
sensors and the front passenger’s
seat belt reminder indicator to work
improperly (see pages and ).
Also check the passenger airbag off
indicator to assure proper operation
of the passenger’s front airbag.
Make sure the rear outer head
restraint is locked in place. If you
fold down the driver’s side seat-
back, also adjust the rear center
head restraint to its lowest
position.
Pull up the release lever on the
outside of the seat-back.
Fold the seat-back forward.
5.
3118
146
93
91
2.
3.
4.
Seats
Carrying Cargo
92
RELEASE LEVER
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２８：２９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００９７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Tug on the seat belt to verify that
the detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.
The seat belt in the rear center seat
is equipped with a detachable anchor.
This allows the center seat belt to be
unlatched when the driver’s side rear
seat is folded.
Pull out the small latch plate and the
latch plate from each holding slot in
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt
to extend it.
Line up the triangle marks on the
small latch plate and anchor buckle
when reattaching the belt and buckle.
CONTINUED
Detachable Anchor
Seats
Instruments and Controls
93
SMALL LATCH
PLATE
LATCH PLATE
SMALL LATCH PLATE
TRIANGLE
MARKS
ANCHOR BUCKLE
Using a seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable
anchor is correctly latched.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２８：３８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００９８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
− To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down to the second
detent, and release it. The window
will automatically go down all the
way. To stop the window, pull back
on the window switch briefly.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open the window, push
the switch down and hold it. Release
the switch when you want to stop the
window. To close the window, pull
back on the switch and hold it.
To unlatch the detachable anchor,
insert the latch plate into the slot on
the side of the anchor buckle. Store
the detachable anchor and seat belt
latch plates in the retractor housing.
To close the window, pull back on
the switch and hold it.
AUTO
Power Windows
Seats, Power Windows
94
DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
ANCHOR BUCKLE
LATCH PLATE
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２８：４５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ００９９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the switch is off, and the passenger
windows cannot be raised or lowered.
To cancel this feature, push on the
switch again to get it to pop out.
Keep the MAIN switch off when you
have children in the vehicle so they
do not injure themselves by
operating the windows
unintentionally.
2.
1.
CONTINUED
All models except Canadian DX
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Power Windows, Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
95
SELECTOR SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
TAB
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２８：５３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１００
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page ).
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
60
3.
4.
Parking Brake
Mirrors, Parking Brake
96
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２９：００ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１０１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
97
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
VANITY MIRROR
SEAT-BACK POCKET
SUN VISOR
PASSENGER’S
TRAY
BEVERAGE HOLDERSREAR SIDE POCKET
(RIGHT SIDE)
COAT HOOK
GLOVE BOX
COIN TRAY
CENTER POCKET
FRONT DOOR POCKET
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２９：０５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１０２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
Open the glove box by pushing the
button. Close it with a firm push.
Glove BoxBeverage Holders
Interior Convenience Items
98
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２９：１１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１０３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch; ON, Door Activated, and
OFF. In the Door Activated (center)
position, the light comes on when
you:
Open any door.
Unlock the doors and the tailgate
with the key or the remote
transmitter (if equipped).
After all doors are closed tightly, the
light fades out in about 30 seconds.
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the door activated position) comes
on when you remove the key from
the ignition switch. If you do not
open a door, the light fades out in
about 30 seconds.
To use the accessory power socket,
pull up the cover. The ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.
It will not power an automotive type
cigarette lighter element.
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
Whenusingthesunvisorforthe
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
This socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
If you leave any door open without
the key in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light will go off after 3
minutes.
Ceiling LightAccessory Power Socket
Sun Visor
Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
99
DOOR ACTIVATED
OFF
ON
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２９：２２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１０４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
100
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２９：２５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１０５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 102
..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 107
............AM/FM Radio Reception . 112
.................................Playing a Disc .114
.......Disc Player Error Messages . 123
..................Protecting Your Discs . 124
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 127
.................Radio Theft Protection . 128
..........................Setting the Clock . 129
............................Security System . 130
...............................Cruise Control . 131
The security system helps to dis-
courage vandalism and theft of your
vehicle.
Features
Features
101
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２９：３０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１０６
2008 Fit
Main Menu
＊
＊ : If equipped
Vents, Heating, and A/C
102
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
BUTTON
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
MODE CONTROL DIALFAN CONTROL DIAL
FRESH AIR/RECIRCULATION
LEVER
U.S. model is shown.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２９：３３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１０７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
Turn this dial to increase or decrease
the fan speed and airflow.
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The
indicatorinthebuttonisonwhen
the A/C is on.
This lever controls the source of the
air going into the system. When you
slide the lever to the side, air is
brought in from outside the vehicle
(fresh air mode). When you select
the side, air from the vehicle’s
interior is sent through the system
again (recirculation mode).
Use the mode control dial to select
the vents the air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and defroster vents at
the base of the windshield.
When you select or ,
the system automatically turns on
the A/C (if equipped). You cannot
turn the A/C off in this mode.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).74
If equipped
Rear Window Defogger Button
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Temperature Control Dial
Fan Control Dial
Fresh Air/Recirculation Lever
Mode Control Dial
Airflow Controls
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Features
103
０７／０６／２８ ２０：２９：５１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１０８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then discharges
it through vents near the tailgate.
Select and .
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Check the high
temperature indicator (see page
). If the indicator begins to blink,
turn off the A/C until the indicator
goes off.
Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and .
Set the fan to the desired speed.
you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in .
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The indicator in the button
comesonwhenafanspeedis
selected.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select .
Set the fan to the desired speed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
63
If equipped
If the interior is very warm,
Using the Heater Using the A/CVentilation
Vents, Heating, and A/C
104
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３０：０２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１０９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
Set the fan to the desired speed or
high for faster defrosting.
Select by sliding the lever.
Select . The system
automatically turns on the A/C
(if equipped). The A/C indicator
willnotcomeonifitwas
previously off.
Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
Select to help clear the
rear window.
To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry and
can prevent the windows from
fogging up.
When you select or ,
the system automatically turns on
the A/C. This helps to dehumidify
the air and to defog the windshield.
In either mode, you cannot turn off
the A/C. When you switch to
another mode, the A/C returns to its
original setting, either on or off, as
indicated by the A/C indicator.Turn the fan on.
If the A/C is off, turn it on (if
equipped).
Select and .
Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
5.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
6.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Defog and DefrostDehumidify the Interior
Features
105
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３０：１０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１１０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel below each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
Select . The system
automatically turns on the A/C (if
equipped). The A/C indicator does
not come on if it was previously off.
Select .
1.
2.
3.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
To Turn Everything Off
106
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３０：１７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１１１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Features
107
AM/FM BUTTON
SEEK BAR
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
PWR/VOL KNOB
SOUND BUTTON
SEEK BAR
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SOUND BUTTON
AM BUTTON
FM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE BAR
TUNE BAR
All models except Sport
Sport model
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３０：２４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１１２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
andplayitfor10seconds.Whenit
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
SEEK bar, then release it.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
Pick a preset number (1 6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
twelve stations.
Use the TUNE bar to tune
to a desired frequency. Press the
side of the bar to tune to a
higher frequency, and the side
to tune to a lower frequency.
Each preset button
(1 6) can store one station on AM,
and two stations on FM.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM
button (AM or FM button except
Sport model). Adjust the volume by
turning the same knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button (AM or FM button). On the
FM band, ST will be displayed if the
stationisbroadcastinginstereo.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not
available.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
1.
2.
3.
4.
SEEK
SCAN
To Play the AM/FM Radio TUNE
PRESET
To Select a Station
Playing the AM/FM Radio
108
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３０：３５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１１３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
To turn off auto select
,pressthe
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
Press the SOUND button repeatedly
to display the equalizer (EQ) [Sport
only], bass, treble, fader, balance,
and speed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC) settings.
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the treble.
Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the PWR/VOL
knob to adjust the setting to your
liking. When the level reaches the
center, you will see a ‘‘ ’’ in the
display.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.112
CONTINUED
Adjusting the SoundAUTO SELECT
BASS
TREBLE
FADER
BALANCE
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Features
109
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３０：４６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１１４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Adjusts the volume level
basedonthevehiclespeed.
Selects the sound equalizer
settings.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the PWR/VOL knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
GROOVE Emphasizes the low
and high ends of the entire spectrum
for a ‘‘powerful’’ sound.
SMOOTH Emphasizes the high
end of the sound spectrum.
VOCAL Emphasizes the middle
end of the sound spectrum.
BEATS Emphasizes the low end
of the sound spectrum.
NORMAL The sound spectrum is
leveled out for most types of music
and general listening preferences.
You can select any of five equalizer
settings. The equalizer adjusts the
frequency ranges to suit the music
or your personal listening
preferences.
On Sport model
On Sport model
Playing the AM/FM Radio
SVC
EQ
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
Equalizer Settings (EQ)
110
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３０：５６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１１５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the system is turned
off.
74
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Audio System Lighting
Features
111
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３１：００ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１１６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
AM/FM Radio Reception
112
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３１：０８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１１７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
AM/FM Radio Reception
Features
113
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３１：１４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１１８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Playing a Disc
114
PWR/VOL KNOB
CD BUTTON
CD SLOT
CD EJECT BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
CD BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
FOLDER BAR
SCAN BUTTON
DISP BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
RANDOM
BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
All models except Sport
Sport model
DISC SLOT
DISC EJECT
BUTTON
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３１：２１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１１９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
To play the radio when a CD is
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the CD player.
To load or play CDs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON(II) position.
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the CD player, press the CD
button. The number of the track
playing is shown in the display. The
system will continuously play a CD
until you change modes.
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot. The drive will pull the CD in
the rest of the way and begin to play
it. When the system reaches the end
of the disc, it will return to the
beginning and play the disc again.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition
switch, the disc will stay in the drive.
When you turn the system back on,
the CD will begin playing where it
left off.
Each time you press and
release the side of the SKIP bar,
the player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the side, to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdthe or side.
To move rapidly within a
track, press and hold the SEEK/
SKIP bar. Press and hold to
move forward. Press and hold
to move backward. Release the
bar when the system reaches the
point you want.
CONTINUED
All models except Sport
To Play a CD To Change or Select Tracks
SKIP
SEEK
Playing a Disc
Features
115
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３１：３１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１２０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition switch, the disc will stay in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the disc will begin playing
where it left off.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the CD. If you eject the CD,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the CD after 10 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD button.
Press the AM or FM button to
switch to the radio while a CD is
playing. To play the CD, press the
CD button.
To continuously replay
a track, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. Press it again to turn it off.
The scan function samples
all the tracks on the disc in the order
they are recorded on the CD. To
activate it, press the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
each track on the CD. Press the
SCAN button again to get out of the
system and play the last track
sampled.
This feature plays the
tracks in random order. To activate
random play, press and release the
RDM button. You will see RDM in
the display. Press it again to return
to normal play.
To Stop Playing a CDREPEAT
SCAN
RANDOM
Playing a Disc
116
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３１：３７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１２１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD
button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display. The number of the track
playing is shown in the display. The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes.
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
The specifications of the compatible
WMA file are:
The disc player can also play CD-Rs
andCD-RWscompressedinCD-
TEXT,MP3,andWMAformats.
When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,
you will see ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ in the
display. You can see up to 99 folders,
and select up to 255 tracks/files.
Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
(MPEG1), 24, 22.05, 16 kHz
(MPEG2)
Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/
64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps
(MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bit rate and
multi-session.
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are:
Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192
kbps
Compatible with variable bit rate and
multi-session.
Maximum layers (including ROOT):
8 layers
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays FORMAT, and then skips to
the next file.
Video CDs and DVDs will not work
in this unit.
CONTINUED
On Sport model
Playing a Disc
To Play a Disc
Features
117
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３１：４５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１２２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
Each time a new track, file, or
folder plays, other than in normal
display mode.
Each time you press the DISP button
while playing a CD-TEXT, the
display mode changes from album
name, to track name, to artist name,
andthentonormaldisplay.When
playing a disc in MP3/WMA, the
display mode changes from folder
name,tofilename,toartisttag,to
album tag, to track tag, and then to
normal display.
If the title is too long, it will not show
all at once. Press and hold the DISP
button, and the rest of the title will
show in the display.
You will also see the album/track
name (CD-TEXT), or the folder/file
name (MP3/WMA) under these
conditions:
To play the AM/FM radio when a
disc is playing, press the AM/FM
button. Press the CD button again to
switch back to the disc player.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
Insert the disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way and begin to
play it. When the system reaches the
end of the disc, it will return to the
beginning and play the disc again.
Playing a Disc
Name Display FunctionTo Load a Disc
118
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３１：５３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１２３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
CONTINUED
In MP3/WMA mode
To
select a different folder, press the
left or right side of the FOLDER bar.
Press the side to skip to the
next folder, and the side to
move to the beginning of the current
folder.Pressitagaintoskiptothe
previous folder.
Each time you
press and release the side, the
player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (files in
MP3/WMA mode). Press and
release the side to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the or side of the
SEEK/SKIP bar.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks (files in
MP3/WMA mode).
In MP3/WMA mode, use the
FOLDER bar to select folders in the
disc, and use the SEEK/SKIP bar to
change files.
Playing a Disc
FOLDER SELECTION
SEEK/SKIP
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
Features
119
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３２：０１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１２４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−−
This feature plays the
tracks within a disc in random order.
In MP3/WMA mode, all files in all
folders are played in random order.
To activate random mode, press the
RDM button repeatedly until you see
RDM in the display. Press and
release the RDM button again to
return to normal play.
This feature,
when activated, replays all the files
on the selected folder in the order
they are compressed in MP3/WMA.
To activate folder repeat mode, press
the RPT button repeatedly until you
see F-RPT in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder.PressandholdtheRPT
button to turn it off.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal playing.
To continuously replay
a track (file in MP3/WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button.
You will see RPT in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button to
turn it off.
In MP3/WMA mode
Playing a Disc
RANDOM
FOLDER-REPEAT
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT)
120
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３２：０６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１２５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−−
In MP3/WMA modeIn MP3/WMA mode
The scan function samples
all the tracks/files on the disc in the
order they are recorded on the disc.
To activate the scan feature, press
the SCAN button. You will see SCAN
in the display. You will get a 10
second sampling of each track on the
disc. You will also see a track/file
name in the display. Press and hold
the SCAN button to get out of the
system and play the last track
sampled.
This
feature, when activated, plays the
files in the current folder in random
order, rather than in the order they
are compressed in MP3/WMA. To
activate folder random play, press
the RDM button. You will see
F-RDM in the display. The system
will then select and play files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random play by
pressing and holding the RDM
button.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play, to within a
disc random play, then to normal
play.
This feature, when
activated, samples the first file of
each folder for 10 seconds. To
activate the folder scan feature,
press the SCAN button repeatedly
until you see F-SCAN in the display.
Thefoldernameisalsodisplayed.
To hear the rest of the folder, press
the SCAN button, within 10 seconds.
If you do not, the system advances to
the next folder, plays 10 seconds of it,
and continues throughout the rest of
the folder the same way. When the
system samples the first file of all
folders, F-SCAN is cancelled, and the
system plays normally.
Playing a Disc
SCAN
FOLDER-RANDOM F-SCAN
Features
121
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３２：１２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１２６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Press the AM/FM button to switch
to the radio while a disc is playing.
Press the CD button to play the disc.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
CD button.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition switch, the disc will stay in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the disc will begin playing
where it left off.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.124
Playing a Disc
To Stop Playing a Disc Protecting Discs
122
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３２：１８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１２７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page .
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Error Massage Cause Solution
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
125
High temperature
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 125). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Disc Player Error Messages
Features
123
HEAT ERROR
FORMAT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３２：２４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１２８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from finger prints, liquids, and felt-
tip pens, can cause the disc to not
play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closedforittobeusedbythe
system.
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
General Information Protecting Discs
Protecting Your Discs
124
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３２：３４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１２９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:
The in-dash disc player has a
sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
maybecomestuckinsideand
damage the audio unit.
Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs
Damaged discs Poor quality discs
1.
2. 3.
CONTINUED
Additional Information of
Recommended Discs
Protecting Your Discs
Features
125
Sealed With Plastic
Ring
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
Warped
Burrs
With Label/
Sticker
Using Printer
Label Kit
Chipped/
Cracked
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３２：４４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１３０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
4. 5.
Protecting Your Discs
126
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape
Arrow ShapeCan Shape
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３２：５４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１３１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The auxiliary input jack is
underneath the accessory power
socket in the center pocket. The
system will accept auxiliary input
from standard audio accessories.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the AUX
button to select it.
U.S. Sport and all Canadian models
Auxiliary Input Jack
Features
127
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３２：５９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１３２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code in the
preset buttons. Because there are
hundreds of number combinations
possible from five digits, making the
system work without knowing the
exact code is nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER
CODE’’ in the frequency display the
nexttimeyouturnonthesystem.
Use the preset buttons to enter the
code. The code is on the radio code
card included in your owner’s
manual kit. When it is entered
correctly, the radio will start playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have 10 tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in 10 attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
hour before trying again.
Radio Theft Protection
128
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３３：０４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１３３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Press and hold the CLOCK
(SOUND) button until you hear a
beep. The displayed time begins to
blink. Change the hours by pressing
the H (preset 4) button until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
Change the minutes by pressing the
M (preset 5) button until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
For example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
Press the CLOCK (SOUND) button
again to enter the set time.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time
is before the half hour, press the
CLOCK (SOUND) button until
you hear a beep, then press the R
(preset 6) button to set the clock
back to the previous hour. If the
displayed time is after the half
hour, the clock sets forward to the
beginning of the next hour.
Setting the Clock
Features
129
CLOCK
H BUTTON
CLOCK
H BUTTON
M BUTTON
RESET
BUTTON
RESET
BUTTON
M BUTTON
All models except Sport Sport model
CLOCK BUTTON
(SOUND)
CLOCK BUTTON
(SOUND)
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３３：１２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１３４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Once the security system is set,
opening any door, the tailgate, or the
hood without using the key or the
remote transmitter, will cause it to
alarm. It also alarms if the radio is
removed from the dashboard or the
wiring is cut.
The security system will not set if
the hood, tailgate, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the door and tailgate open
indicator on the instrument panel
(see page ) to see if the doors and
tailgatearefullyclosed.Sinceitis
notpartofthemonitordisplay,
manually check the hood.
To see if the system is set
after you exit the vehicle, press the
LOCK button on the remote
transmitter within 5 seconds. If the
system is set, the horn will beep
once.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, position lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the audio unit.
This alarm continues for 2 minutes,
then the system resets. To reset an
alarming system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
The alarm will also be activated if
the passenger inside the locked
vehicle turns the ignition switch on.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doorsandthetailgatefromthe
outside with the key, driver’s lock
tab, door lock master switch, or
remote transmitter. The security
system indicator on the instrument
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
62
On Sport model
Security System
130
NOTE:
SECURITY SYSTEM
INDICATOR
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３３：１９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１３５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
Press and release the SET/
DECELbuttononthesteering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slowdown.Thiswillcancelcruise
control. To resume the set speed,
press the RES/ACCEL button. The
indicator on the instrument panel will
come back on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshifttoholdthesetspeed.
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
The main switch can be left
on,evenwhenthesystemisnotin
use.
1.
2.
3.
On Sport model and Canadian LX
model
Cruise Control
Using the Cruise Control
Features
131
NOTE:
DECEL/SET
BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３３：２８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１３６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, the vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
the instrument panel goes out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the DECEL/
SET button.
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal causes the cruise
control to cancel.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
132
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３３：３６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１３７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system will remember the previously
set cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h), and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.
Tapping either of the paddle shifters
shifts the gear up or down, but does
not cancel the cruise control. For
more information on driving with
paddle shifters, see page .162
Cruise Control
Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
Features
133
CRUISE BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３３：４５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１３８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
134
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３３：４７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１３９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
.............................Break-in Period . 136
.................Fuel Recommendation . 136
.........Service Station Procedures . 137
....................................Refueling . 137
Opening and Closing
................................the Hood . 138
...................................Oil Check . 139
.............Engine Coolant Check . 140
...............................Fuel Economy . 141
...Accessories and Modifications . 144
.............................Carrying Cargo . 146
Before Driving
Before Driving
135
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３３：５１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１４０
2008 Fit
Main Menu
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
During this period:
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 % ethanol by
volume and up to 15 % MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Quick Start Guide
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
136
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３４：００ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１４１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Put the
attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
Outside of the vehicle, open the
fuel fill door by pulling its notched
edge.
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
Service Station Procedures
Refueling
Before Driving
137
ATTACHMENT
FUEL FILL CAP
TETHER
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３４：０８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１４２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle under the lower left
corner of the dashboard. The
hood will pop up slightly.
Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to the left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle up to release it.
Lift up the hood.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
the malfunction indicator lamp
maycomeon(seepage ).You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
Close the fuel fill door.
1. 2.
5.
6.
231
Service Station Procedures
Opening and Closing the Hood
138
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
LATCH
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３４：１６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１４３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
Holding the grip, pull the support
rod out of its clip. Insert the end
into the designated hole in the
hood.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
1.
2.
3.
3. 4.
187
Oil Check
Adding Engine Oil
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
139
SUPPORT ROD
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
CLIP
GRIP
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３４：２６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１４４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to
on page for
information about checking other
items on your vehicle.
190
184
Service Station Procedures
Engine Coolant Check
Adding
Engine Coolant
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks
140
MAX RESERVE TANK
MIN
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３４：３１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１４５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
km) per year multiplied by the cost
pergallon(basedonEPAfuelcost
data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit
(Canada: Visit
)
Represents urban
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A
range of miles per gallon achieved is
also provided.
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shownintheexampletotheright
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
achieved is also provided.
www.
fueleconomy.gov www.
vehicles.gc.ca
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost
City MPG
Combined Fuel Economy
Highway MPG
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
141
Combined Fuel
Economy
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
City MPG Highway MPG
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３４：４０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１４６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
aremoreefficientwhenwarmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the
information display (see
on page ).
For example:
Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, you can
boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon.
An under-inflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.
184
Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
).
Improving Fuel Economy
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
Drive moderately
Observe the speed limit
Always drive in the highest gear
possible
Avoid excessive idling
Maintain proper tire inflation
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle
Keep your vehicle clean
187
Vehicle Maintenance
Drive Efficiently
Fuel Economy
142
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３４：５２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１４７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
Reset trip counter to zero.
Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
Follow one of the simple calculations above.
The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Checking Your Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system
Plan and combine trips
Calculating Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
143
Miles per
Gallon
100
Kilometers
Gallons
of fuel
Miles
driven
Liter
Lper
100 km
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３５：０２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１４８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
theseareasmayinterferewith
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system (if
equipped).
234
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
144
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３５：１０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１４９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components, with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Lowering the vehicle with a non-
Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Herearesomeexamples:
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) .
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
: If equipped
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle
Before Driving
145
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３５：１７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１５０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Seat-back pocket
Center pocket
Cargo area side pocket
Cargo area, including the rear
seatswhenfoldedupordown.
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
Front door pockets
Carrying Cargo
146
GLOVE BOX
CARGO AREA
FRONT DOOR POCKETS
CENTER POCKET
SEAT-BACK POCKETREAR SIDE POCKET
(RIGHT SIDE)
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３５：２６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１５１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. vehicles,
and 395 kg for Canadian vehicles.
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
Label Example
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
(1)
(2)
(3)
CONTINUED
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits (Payload)
Before Driving
147
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３５：３６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１５２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−×
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
areonalabelonthedriver’s
doorjamb.
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
(4)
(5)
(6)
Carrying Cargo
148
Passenger Weight
(150lbsx2=300lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150lbsx4=600lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150lbsx5=750lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(550 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(250 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(100 lbs)
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３５：４８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１５３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Ifyoufoldtherearseatsupor
down, tie down items that could be
thrown about the vehicle during a
crash or sudden stop. Also, keep
all cargo below the bottom of the
windows. If it is higher, it could
interfere with the proper operation
ofthesidecurtainairbags.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
underneath and interfere with the
proper operation of the seats, the
sensors under the seats, or the
driver’s ability to operate the
pedals.
Do not stack items higher than the
back of the rear seats. They can
block your view and be thrown
around the vehicle during a crash.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of
, follow the instructions
on page .53
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo AreaCarrying Cargo in the Passenger
Compartment
carbon monoxide
poisoning
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
149
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３５：５５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１５４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Theseparationnetcanbeusedto
hold back soft, lightweight items
stored in the cargo area. Heavy
items should be properly secured on
the floor of the cargo area. The net
may not prevent heavy items from
being thrown forward in a crash or a
sudden stop.
The four hooks on the floor can be
used to install a net for securing
items.
Optional Separation Net
Carrying Cargo
150
HOOK
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３６：００ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１５５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
manual and automatic transmissions.
It also includes important
information on parking your vehicle,
the braking system, and the tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) .
........................Driving Guidelines . 152
........................Preparing to Drive . 153
.......................Starting the Engine . 154
...................Manual Transmission . 155
..............Automatic Transmission . 157
Driving with the Paddle
.................Shifters (Sport only) . 162
...........................................Parking . 166
.............................Braking System . 167
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 168
Tire Pressure Monitoring
......................System (TPMS) . 170
...........................Towing a Trailer . 173
: If equipped
Driving
Driving
151
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３６：０３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１５６
2008 Fit
Main Menu
Curbs and steep inclines could
damage the front and rear
bumpers. Low curbs that do not
affect the average vehicle may be
high enough to hit the bumper on
your vehicle. The front or rear
bumper may scrape when trying to
drive onto an incline, such as a
steep driveway or trailer ramps.
Your vehicle is designed to give you
optimum handling and performance
on well-maintained roads. As part of
this design, your vehicle has a
minimum of ground clearance.
Use caution if you ever drive your
vehicleonveryroughorrutted
roads. You could damage the
suspension and underbody by
bottoming out. Going too fast over
parking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ can
also cause damage.
On Sport model
Driving Guidelines
152
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３６：０８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１５７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check the seat adjustment (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page ).
Make sure the doors and the
tailgate are securely closed and
locked.
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check that the hood is fully closed.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page ).
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
1.
2.
10.
14
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
95
75
59
209
86
Preparing to Drive
Driving
153
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３６：１８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１５８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
Press the clutch pedal down all the
way. The START (III) position
does not function unless the clutch
pedal is pressed.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Manual transmission:
Automatic transmission:
Starting the Engine
154
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom theft. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page .
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
77
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３６：２７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１５９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Come to a full stop before you shift
into reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into reverse, or shift into one
of the forward gears for a moment.
This stops the gears so they won’t
‘‘grind.’’
The manual transmission is
synchronized in all forward gears for
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from fifth to
reverse. When shifting up or down,
make sure you push the clutch pedal
down all the way, shift to the next
gear, and let the pedal up gradually.
When you are not shifting, do not
rest your foot on the clutch pedal.
This can cause the clutch to wear out
faster.
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure the engine speed will not
go into the tachometer’s red zone in
the lower gear.
Manual Transmission
Driving
155
Rapid slowing or speeding up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３６：３２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１６０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you good
fuel economy and effective
emissions control. The following
shift points are recommended:
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
The engine speed limiter only works
when you upshift; engine speed is
not limited during downshifts.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
Normal acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
27 mph (43 km/h)
39 mph (62 km/h)
53 mph (85 km/h)
Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter
Manual Transmission
156
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３６：３８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１６１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
To shift from Park to any position,
press firmly on the brake pedal and
pressthereleasebuttononthefront
of the shift lever, then pull the lever.
YoucannotshiftoutofParkwhen
the ignition switch is in the LOCK
(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.
CONTINUED
Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting
Automatic Transmission
Driving
157
SHIFT LEVER
RELEASE BUTTON
Sport model All models except Sport
Sport model is shown
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３６：４６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１６２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
− This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
buttononthefrontoftheshiftlever
to move it.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. You must also press the
release button to shift into Park. The
shift lever must be in Park before
you can remove the key from the
ignition switch.
161
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
DtoS
StoD
DtoN
NtoD
RtoN
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
press the shift lever release
button.
Press the shift lever release
button.
Move the shift lever.
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
press the shift lever release
button.
Press the shift lever release
button.
Move the shift lever.
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoD
DtoN
DtoD
NtoD
RtoN
3
3
3
3
All models except Sport Sport model
Park (P)
Shift Lock Release
Automatic Transmission
158
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３６：５２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１６３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
Press the brake
pedal and press the release button
on the front of the shift lever to shift
from Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
completestop,andthenshift.Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
This position is similar
to D, except only the first three
gears are selected. Use D to provide
engine braking when going down a
steep hill. D can also keep the
transmission from cycling between
third and fourth gears in stop-and-go
driving.
To shift to second,
pressthereleasebuttononthefront
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To help reduce wheel spin.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
3
3
All models except Sport
All models except Sport
Automatic Transmission
Reverse (R)
Neutral (N)
Drive (D)
Drive (D )
Second (2)
3
Driving
159
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３７：０１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１６４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−− To shift into the S
position, press the release button on
the front of the shift lever, and move
the lever to S. This position is similar
to D, except only gears from first to
fourth are selected. The S position
keeps the transmission from cycling
between fourth and fifth gears in
stop-and-go driving.
To shift from second to
first, press the release button on the
front of the shift lever. This position
locks the transmission in first gear.
By upshifting and downshifting
through 1, 2, D , and D, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
With the shift lever in D or S, you
canalsousethepaddleshiftersto
shift the transmission up or down.
With the paddle shifters, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal. For more information
on driving with the paddle shifters,
see page .162
3
All models except Sport On Sport model
S position (S)First (1)
Engine Speed Limiter
Automatic Transmission
160
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３７：０６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１６５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
Set the parking brake.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Push down on the key while you
pressthereleasebuttononthe
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.
Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.
Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the left side. Press the
brake pedal, and restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
Putaclothonthenotchofthe
shift lock release slot cover. Using
a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a
metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the notch of the cover to
remove it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Shift Lock Release
Automatic Transmission
Driving
161
COVER
RELEASE
BUTTON
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
NOTCH
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３７：１５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１６６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋
−
＋
−
When you are driving in D position,
you can shift the transmission up or
down manually with the paddle
shifters.
When you pull either paddle shifter,
the gear position indicator shows you
the selected gear number.
When the transmission returns to
drive mode (D), the displayed gear
number goes out.
Each time you pull the (right), the
transmission shifts to a higher gear.
Pull the (left) to downshift. You
will see the selected gear number on
the instrument panel.
To shift up or down, use the
(right) or (left) paddle shifter on
each side of the steering wheel.
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)
Using the Paddle Shifters in D
position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)
162
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３７：２２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１６７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The transmission downshifts to first
gear and returns to drive mode (D)
when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop and the vehicle speed
is about 6 mph (10 km/h).
If there is a problem in the
transmission while you are driving
with the paddle shifters, the D
indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift
mode is canceled, and the
transmission returns to drive mode
(D).
Each time you pull either paddle
shifter, the transmission shifts one
gear up or down. If you want to shift
up or down more than two gears, pull
the paddle shifter twice, pause, and
then pull it again.
The transmission remains in the
selected gear if you do not accelerate.
You cannot downshift with the
paddle shifter before the engine
speed reaches the upper limit of the
lower gear. If you try to do this, the
gear position indicator will flash the
numberofthelowergearseveral
times, then return to a higher gear
position.
Also, you cannot upshift with the
paddle shifter before the engine
speed reaches the lower limit of the
higher gear.
Downshifting with the paddle shifter
allows you to increase the engine
braking when going down steep or
long hills, and provides more power
when climbing uphills. You can
upshift the transmission manually to
reduce the rpm. Driving in the
higher gear helps fuel economy.
The transmission control system
monitors the accelerator pedal use
and your driving conditions. When
you press the accelerator pedal as in
normal driving, the system judges
that you are driving at a constant
cruising speed without using the
paddle shifters. Under these
conditions, D-paddle shift mode is
canceled, and the transmission
automatically returns to drive mode
(D).
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)
Driving
163
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３７：２９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１６８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋
−
When you move the shift lever from
‘‘D’’ to ‘‘S’’ position and pull either
paddle shifter, the gear position
indicator displays on ‘‘M’’ along with
the selected gear number.
To upshift, pull the (right) paddle
shifter. To downshift, pull the
(left) paddle shifter.
When you accelerate from a stop,
the transmission starts in first gear,
and you must manually upshift
between first and fifth gears. Make
sure you upshift before the engine
speed reaches the tachometer’s red
zone.
The transmission remains in the
selectedgear(5,4,3,2,or1).There
is no automatic downshift when you
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor.
When you are driving in 4th or 5th
gear, the transmission downshifts to
the lower gear under the following
conditions:
The vehicle slows down to a
certain speed.
You press the brake pedal.
With the shift lever in S position, you
can select the sequential shift mode
to shift gears; much like a manual
transmission using the paddle
shifters, but without a clutch pedal.
To enter the sequential shift mode,
pressthereleasebuttononthefront
of the shift lever, move the lever to
the S position, then pull either paddle
shifter. To return to drive mode (D),
move the shift lever to the D position.
While you are driving in the
sequential shift mode, the
transmission will not automatically
return to drive mode (D).
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)
Using the Paddle Shift in S
position (Sequential Shift Mode)
164
‘‘M’’ INDICATOR
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３７：３８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１６９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
＋
Downshifting gives you more power
when climbing, and provides engine
braking when going down a steep hill.
The transmission also shifts
automatically as the vehicle comes to
a complete stop. It downshifts to first
gear when the vehicle speed reaches
6mph(10km/h)orless.
You cannot downshift with the
paddle shifter before the engine
speed reaches the upper limit of the
lower gear. If you try to do this, the
gear indicator will flash the number
of the lower gear several times, then
the indicator will display the higher
gear number.
If the vehicle speed decreases below
the redline of the selected lower gear
while the indicator is flashing, the
transmission downshifts, and the
indicator displays the selected gear.
To shift
from
12
23
34
45
Speed range
over 0 mph (0 km/h)
over 6 mph (10 km/h)
over 21 mph (34 km/h)
over 30 mph (48 km/h)
Here are the speed ranges for
upshifting and downshifting.
To shift
from
21
32
43
Speed range
under 25 mph (40 km/h)
under 47 mph (75 km/h)
under 75 mph (121 km/h)
When you are in sequential shift
mode, and the vehicle is stopped,
pull the (right) paddle shifter to
shift to second gear. You will see ‘‘M
2’’ in the display. Starting in second
gear helps to reduce wheelspin in
deep snow or on a slippery surface.
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)
Starting in Second Gear
Driving
165
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３７：４６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１７０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission.
Make sure the windows are closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Lock the doors and the tailgate.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in first gear
and set the parking brake.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in reverse gear
and set the parking brake.
On Sport model
Parking Tips
Parking
166
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３７：５５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１７１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious and alert in your driving.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Your vehicle is equipped with front
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear
wheels are drum. A power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on
the brake pedal. The anti-lock brake
system (ABS) helps you retain
steering control when braking very
hard.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness
and reduces brake pad life. In
addition, fuel economy can be
reduced. It also keeps your brake
lights on all the time, confusing
drivers behind you.
If the front brake pads need
replacing, you will hear a distinctive,
metallic screeching sound when you
apply the brake pedal. If you do not
have the brake pads replaced, they
will screech all the time. It is normal
for the brakes to occasionally squeal
or squeak when you apply them.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Braking System
Braking System Design
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
Driving
167
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３８：０２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１７２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helpspreventthewheelsfrom
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
If this indicator comes on, the anti-
lock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
page .
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
232
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS Indicator
168
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３８：０９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１７３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
232
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
Driving
169
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３８：１５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１７４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Becausetirepressurevariesby
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low, the sensor in that
tire immediately sends a signal that
causes the low tire pressure
indicator to come on.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).218
U.S. models only
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
170
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３８：２３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１７５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire
maybecomeoverinflated.However,
the low tire pressure indicator will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.
Refer to page for tire inflation
guidelines.
When you restart the vehicle with
thecompactsparetire,theTPMS
indicator may also come on and stay
on after driving several miles
(kilometers).
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
thetirepressuresmonthly.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire
information label and in the owner’s
manual (see page ).
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
209
210
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Driving
171
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３８：３０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１７６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure indicator will come on.
Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
Each wheel (except the compact
sparetirewheel)isequippedwitha
tire pressure sensor mounted inside
the tire behind the valve stem. You
must use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
After you replace the flat tire with
thecompactsparetire,thelowtire
pressure indicator stays on. This is
normal; the system is not monitoring
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
The low tire pressure indicator or
the TPMS indicator will go off, after
several miles (kilometers) driving,
when you replace the spare tire with
the specified regular tire equipped
with the tire pressure monitor sensor.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
218
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a Tire with TPMS
172
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３８：３８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１７７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a
trailer. Attempting to do so can void
your warranties. Your vehicle can be towed behind a
motorhome at legal highway speeds
up to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do not
exceed 65 mph (100 km/h).
Otherwise, severe transmission
damage will occur.
When purchasing a tow bar, make
sure you select a reputable
manufacturer and installer. Follow
the manufacturer’s attachment
instructions carefully.
Press on the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever through all its
positions.
Start the engine.
Check the transmission fluid level
(see page ).
Perform the following procedure
every day immediately before you
begin towing. Otherwise severe
automatic transmission damage will
occur.
1.
2.
3.
193
CONTINUED
Do not overfill.
Automatic transmission:
Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a
Motorhome
Driving
173
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３８：４７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１７８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Shift to D position and hold for 5
seconds, then to N. Let the engine
runfor3minutes,thenturnitoff.
Release the parking brake.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio is off, and
remove any item plugged into the
accessory power socket so you do
not run down the battery.
If you tow more than 8 hours in one
day, you should repeat the above
procedure at least every 8 hours
(when you stop for fuel, etc.)
4. 5.
6.
7.
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Extended Towing
174
Severe transmission damage will occur
if the vehicle is shif ted f rom reverse to
neutral and then towed with the drive
wheels on the ground.
Failure to f ollow the recommended
instructions exactly will result in severe
automatic transmission damage. If you
cannot shift the transmission or start
the engine, your vehicle must be
transported on a f lat-bed truck or
trailer.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３８：５３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１７９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you tow your vehicle with an
automatic transmission, the Honda
Genuine ATF-Z1 transmission fluid
must be changed every 2 years or
30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever
comes first.
Move the shifter into the Neutral
position.
Release the parking brake.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio is off, and
remove any item plugged into the
accessory power socket so you do
not run down the battery.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manual transmission:
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Driving
175
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３９：００ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１８０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
176
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３９：０２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１８１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the information display, and
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
yourself.
......................Maintenance Safety . 178
....................Maintenance Minder . 179
..............................Fluid Locations . 186
........................Adding Engine Oil . 187
Changing the Engine Oil
....................................and Filter . 188
..............................Engine Coolant . 190
....................Windshield Washers . 192
.......................Transmission Fluid . 193
Automatic Transmission
.......................................Fluid . 193
....Manual Transmission Fluid . 194
................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 195
.............................................Lights . 196
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 203
.....................................Floor Mats . 203
..............................Audio Antenna . 204
..................DustandPollenFilter .205
.................................Wiper Blades . 205
...........................................Wheels . 208
...............................................Tires . 208
...................Checking the Battery . 214
.............................Vehicle Storage . 216
261
Maintenance
Maintenance
177
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３９：０７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１８２
2008 Fit
Main Menu
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust.
Injury from moving parts.
Burns from hot parts.
178
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３９：１７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１８３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 % 91 %
90 % 81 %
80 % 71 %
70 % 61 %
60 % 51 %
50 % 41 %
40 % 31 %
30 % 21 %
20 % 16 %
15 % 11 %
10 % 6 %
5% 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
The remaining engine oil life is
shownonthedisplayaccordingto
this table:
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, then press and release
the select/reset knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life indicator
appears (see page ).
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display to show you
when you should have your dealer do
engine oil replacement and indicated
maintenance service.
69
Maintenance Minder
Engine Oil Life Display
Maintenance
179
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
SELECT/RESET KNOB
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３９：２５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１８４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
below the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message.
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
The 15 and 10 percent oil life
indicator reminds you that the time
is coming soon to take your vehicle
in for the required maintenance.
Maintenance Minder
180
MAINTENANCE
ITEM CODE(S)
ENGINE OIL LIFE
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３９：３０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１８５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance, negative mileage is
displayed and begins to blink after
the vehicle has been driven 10 miles
(10 km) or more.
Negative mileage means your
vehicle has passed the maintenance
required point.
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position. The
maintenance minder indicator
( ) also comes on and remains
on in the instrument panel. When
you see this message, immediately
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer.
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page ).
You can switch the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the trip
meter. Press and release the select/
reset knob on the instrument panel.
Whentheengineoillifeis15to1
percent, the maintenance minder
indicator ( ) comes on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, then it goes out
if you switch the information display.
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenancedonebyyourdealer.
182
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
181
NEGATIVE MILEAGE
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３９：４０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１８６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Press the select/reset knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life
is displayed.
All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page .
To change the information display
from the engine oil life display to the
odometer or the trip meter, press
and release the select/reset knob.
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
( )remainsonevenifyou
change the information display.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on the
following.
1.
2.185
Maintenance Minder
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
182
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３９：４９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１８７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
canleadtoseriousmechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
Press the select/reset knob for
another 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
Press the select/reset knob for
about 10 seconds. The engine oil
life and the maintenance item
code(s) will blink.
4.3.
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
Maintenance
183
０７／０６／２８ ２０：３９：５６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１８８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
＃
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page .
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Maintenance Log. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend using Honda parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
139
140
193
210
195
196
Maintenance Minder
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
Maintenance,
replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and
systems may be done by any
automotive repair establishment
or individual using parts that are
‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards.
184
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４０：０６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１８９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＃
＃
＃
＊
Maintenance Minder
185
:
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
If the message, ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
Independent of maintenance message in the information display, replace
the brake fluid every 3 years.
NOTE:
1:
184
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more
frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under
these conditions, have the transmission fluid
changed at 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every
30,000 miles (48,000 km). (For A/T only)
If you tow a FIT behind a motorhome, the
transmission fluid must be changed every 2 years or
30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever comes first.
(For A/T only)
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
A
B
Symbol Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
1
Maintenance Minder
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４０：１４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１９０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Fluid Locations
186
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop)
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
CLUTCH FLUID
(Manual
Transmission only)
(Gray cap)
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
ENGINE OIL
DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４０：１８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１９１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in
the oil slowly and carefully so you do
not spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment. Reinstall the engine
oil fill cap, and tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes, and recheck the
oil level on the engine oil dipstick.
Do not fill above the upper mark; you
could damage the engine.
Adding Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil
Maintenance
187
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Ambient Temperature
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４０：２６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１９２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil, it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals given in the maintenance
schedule.
1.
2.
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
188
WASHER
OIL DRAIN BOLT
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４０：３４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１９３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the engine block. If it
is, remove it before installing a
new oil filter.
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
3.
5.
6.
7.
8.
4.
9.
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Maintenance
189
OIL FILTER
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
3.8 US qt (3.6
)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４０：４４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１９４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-life Anti-
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant
190
RESERVE TANK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４０：５０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１９５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
3.
4.
2.
1.
5.
6.
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
191
RADIATOR CAP
RESERVE TANK
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４０：５８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１９６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
The low washer
level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page ).
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge.
65
On Canadian models:
Windshield Washers
192
LEVEL GAUGE
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４１：０４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１９７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
Remove the dipstick, and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid).Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
1.
2.
3.
5.
4.
CONTINUED
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
193
DIPSTICK
UPPER
MARK
LOWER
MARK
HOT
MARK
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４１：１４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１９８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle on level
ground. Remove the transmission
filler bolt, and carefully feel inside
the bolt hole with your finger. The
fluid level should be up to the edge
of the bolt hole. If it is not, add
Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
(MTF) until it starts to run out of the
hole.
Put a new washer on the filler bolt,
then reinstall the filler bolt and
tighten it securely.
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
6.
Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
194
WASHERCorrect level
FILLER BOLT
Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do
not mix with other transmission f luids.
Using transmission f luid other than
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause
deterioration in transmission operation
and durability, and could result in
damage to the transmission.
Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Honda
Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the
Honda new vehicle warranty.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４１：２３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０１９９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Manual Transmission only
A low fluid level can indicate a leak
in the clutch system. Have this
system inspected as soon as possible.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If it is not, add
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly.
Replace the brake fluid according to
the time recommendation in the
maintenance minder schedule.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads/shoes.
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Clutch FluidBrake Fluid
Maintenance
195
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４１：３３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２００
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
To change the bulb on the driver’s
side, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
right, then turn off the engine. To
change the bulb on the passenger’s
side, turn the steering wheel to the
left.
Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the holding clip from the
inner fender, then pull the inner
fender cover back.
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area, readjustment may be
required. Adjustments should be
done by your dealer or other
qualified mechanic.
1.
2.
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Lights
196
HOLDING CLIP
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４１：４０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２０１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
Make sure that the hold-down
wire is installed properly and
securely. You can check its
installation from the inspection
window on the headlight assembly.
Install the rubber seal over the
back of the headlight assembly.
Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot the wire
out of the way, then remove the
bulb.
Install the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place, and clip the end into
the slot.
5.
6.
3.
4.
7.
8.
CONTINUED
Lights
Maintenance
197
RUBBER WEATHER SEAL
HOLD-DOWN
WIRE BULB
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
HOLD-DOWN
WIRE
INSPECTION WINDOW
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４１：４９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２０２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the holding clip from the
inner fender, then pull the inner
fender cover back.
To change the bulb on the driver’s
side, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
right, then turn off the engine. To
change the bulb on the passenger’s
side, turn the steering wheel to the
left.
Reinstall the inner fender cover.
Then reinstall the holding clip, and
lock it in place by pushing on its
center.
Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely. Turn on the
headlights to test the new bulb. 1.
2.
9.
10.
Lights
Replacing a Parking Light/Front
Side Marker Bulb and a Turn
Signal Light Bulb
198
HOLDING CLIP
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４１：５５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２０３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Reinstall the inner fender cover.
Then reinstall the holding clip, and
lock it in place by pushing on its
center.
The fog lights use halogen bulbs.
When replacing a bulb, handle it
carefully. See page for more
information.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
196
CONTINUED
On Sport model
ReplacingaFogLightBulb
Lights
Maintenance
199
PARKING LIGHT/FRONT SIDE MARKER
BULB
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT BULB
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４２：０３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２０４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Turn on the fog lights to test the
new bulb.
Reinstall the fog light assembly,
then tighten the screw.
Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the screw.
To remove the fog light assembly,
slide it inward, then carefully pull
it out of the bumper.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Lights
200
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
SCREW
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４２：１２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２０５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of the light assembly
cover. Remove the cover by
carefully prying in the notch on its
middle edge with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight, back-
up light, turn signal light, or
taillight.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Remove the burned out bulb from
the socket by pulling it straight out
of its socket.
Install the new bulb in the socket.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Reinstall the light assembly cover.
1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
Lights
Maintenance
201
LIGHT ASSEMBLY COVER
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４２：２１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２０６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Open the tailgate. Remove the
light assembly cover by pushing in
the tabs on both sides and pulling
the cover off.
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
Put the socket back into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Press the brake pedal to make
sure the new bulb is working.
Put the cover back on the light
assembly. Push it in until it locks
in place.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
Lights
202
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４２：２９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２０７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with
genuine Honda floor mats, the mats
hook over floor mat anchors. This
keeps the floor mats from sliding
forward and possibly interfering with
the pedals or making the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective.
CONTINUED
Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats
(Optional)
Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Maintenance
203
FRONT
LOOP
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４２：３６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２０８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
A non-Honda floor mat may not fit
your vehicle properly. This could
prevent the proper operation of the
folding rear seats and the passenger’s
seat weight sensors. We recommend
using genuine Honda floor mats. Do
not put additional floor mats on top
of the anchored mats.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
tore-anchoritwhenyouputitback
in your vehicle.
Foor Mats, Audio Antenna
Audio Antenna
204
REAR
Your vehicle is equipped with an
antenna at the rear of the roof . Bef ore
using a ‘‘drive-through’’ car wash,
remove the antenna by unscrewing it by
hand. This prevents the antenna f rom
being damaged by the car wash brushes.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４２：４２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２０９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
This filter removes the dust and
pollenthatisbroughtinfromthe
outside through the heating and
cooling system.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the heating and cooling system
becomeslessthanusual.
To replace a front wiper blade:
Raise each wiper arm off the
windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
1.
CONTINUED
On models with A/C
Wiper BladesDust and Pollen Filter
Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades
Maintenance
205
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４２：５０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２１０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
Press and hold the lock tab.
Slide the blade assembly toward
the lock tab until it releases
from the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Make sure the three rubber tabs
inside the blade fit to each notch
of the reinforcement, as shown.
2. 3. 4.
Wiper Blades
206
LOCK TAB
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
BLADE
TOP
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４２：５８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２１１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To replace the rear wiper blade:
Raise the wiper arm off the glass.
Slide the blade out of the wiper
arm.
Examine the new wiper blade. If it
has no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade and install them in the
slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
Place the top of the wiper blade on
the end of the blade assembly, and
slide the blade onto the assembly
in the direction pointed to by the
arrow.
Make sure the blade is completely
installed.
2.
3.
1.
5.
6.
7.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
207
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４３：０７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２１２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
thesamesolution,andrinsethem
thoroughly.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps
the aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels
with harsh chemicals (including
some commercial wheel cleaners)
or a stiff brush can damage the
clear-coat. To clean the wheels,
use a mild detergent and a soft
brush or sponge.
Slide the new blade into the wiper
arm. Make sure it is engaged in
the slot along its full length.
Lower the wiper arm.
4.
5.
If equipped
TiresWheels
Wiper Blades, Wheels, Tires
208
REINFORCEMENT
BLADE
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４３：１６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２１３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
sparetireatthesametime.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page for
more information.
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to6psi(30to40kPa,0.3to0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Youshoulduseyourowntire
pressure gauge whenever you check
your tire pressures. This will make it
easier for you to tell if a pressure
loss is due to a tire problem and not
due to a variation between gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.: If equipped
170
Tires
Inflation Guidelines
Maintenance
209
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４３：２５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２１４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page .
The following charts show the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumpsorbulgesinthetreador
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
248
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Tire Size
Tire Size
All models except Sport
Sport model
Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures Tire Inspection
210
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
P175/65R14 81S
P195/55R15 84H
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４３：３７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２１５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See
on page ).248
Tires
Tire Service Life Tire Maintenance
Tire
Labeling
Maintenance
211
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
On vehicles with aluminum wheels,
improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights f or
balancing.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４３：４６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２１６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels (if equipped). If you
do not, the tire pressure monitoring
system will not work.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS to work inconsistently.
TheABSworksbycomparingthe
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
activate.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display. Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated. If
you purchase directional tires, rotate
only front-to-back.
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.
Tires
Replacing Tires and WheelsTire Rotation
212
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Front Front
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４３：５５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２１７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋
CONTINUED
Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Wheels:
Tires:
See page for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
for tire size and labeling
information.
246
248
Sport model
Sport model
All models except Sport
All models except Sport
Tires
Winter DrivingWheel and Tire Specifications
Snow Tires
Maintenance
213
14x51/2JJ
15x6JJ
P175/65R14 81S
P195/55R15 84H
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４４：０６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２１８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices, with
rubber chain tensioners, on the front
tires. Use traction devices only when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires. Metal link-
type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used. Check the condition of the battery
monthlybylookingatthetest
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors. The test indicator window’s
location differs according to the
battery manufacturer.
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Tires, Checking the Battery
Checking the Battery
Tire Chains
214
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４４：１３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２１９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the
audio system may disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradio,you
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
bars to enter the code (see page
).
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting is lost. To reset the time, see
page .
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
129
128
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
Checking the Battery
Maintenance
215
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４４：１９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２２０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in reverse
(manual) or Park (automatic).
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
ragsotheydonottouchthe
windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
Vehicle Storage
216
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４４：２８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２２１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 218
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 219
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 224
................................Jump Starting . 226
..............If the Engine Overheats . 228
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 230
..........Charging System Indicator . 230
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 231
...............Brake System Indicator . 232
..............................................Fuses . 233
..............................Fuse Locations . 236
......................Emergency Towing . 238
..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 239
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
217
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４４：３２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２２２
2008 Fit
Main Menu
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
samewheel.Thesparetireisnot
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Do not mount tire chains on the
compact spare tire.
On vehicles with the TPMS
system, the low tire pressure
indicator comes on and stays on
after you replace the flat tire with
the compact spare tire. After
several miles (kilometers) driving
with the compact spare tire, the
TPMS indicator comes on and the
low tire pressure indicator goes off.
Compact Spare Tire
218
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４４：４０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２２３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park (automatic)
or reverse (manual). Apply the
parking brake.
Open the tailgate. Raise the cargo
area floor lid by lifting it up with
the strap that has a loop. To keep
the floor lid open, hook the loop of
the strap to a leg of the rear center
head restraint.
Take the tool kit out of the spare
tire.
4.
3.
2.
1.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
219
JACK
STRAP
TOOL KIT
SPARE
TIRE
LOOP
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４４：４８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２２４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Take the jack out of the cargo
area.
Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack by lifting it straight
up.
Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
On all models except Sport,
remove the wheel cover by
carefully prying under its edge
with the flat tip of the extension.
5.
6.
7. 8.
Changing a Flat Tire
220
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
WHEEL NUT
WHEEL COVER
EXTENSION
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４４：５６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２２５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
△
CONTINUED
Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Remove the wheel nuts, then
removetheflattire.Handlethe
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. It is pointed to by a
mark molded into the underside of
the body (Sport model). Turn the
end bracket clockwise until the top
of the jack contacts the jacking
point. Make sure the jacking point
tab is resting in the jack notch.
9.
11.
12.10.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
221
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
BRAKE HUB
JACKING POINT
EXTENSION
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４５：０３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２２６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Place the flat tire face down in the
sparetirewell.
Securetheflattirebyscrewing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
On Sport model:
Changing a Flat Tire
222
For
normal
tire
For
spare
tire
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４５：１０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２２７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Store the jack. Place the tool kit in
the center of the flat tire.
Store the wheel cover or center
cap in the cargo area. Make sure it
will not get scratched or damaged.
Remove the strap loop from the
leg of the head restraint, then
lower the floor lid, and close the
tailgate.
Align the valve mark on the wheel
cover to the tire valve on the
wheel, then install the wheel cover.
Make sure the wire support ring is
hooked into the clips around the
edge of the wheel cover.
1.
2.
19.
20.
21.
All models except Sport
Changing a Flat Tire
Installing a wheel cover
Taking Care of the Unexpected
223
CLIPS
CLIPS
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４５：１９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２２８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
Make sure the wire support ring is
ontheoutersideofthetirevalve
as shown.
3.
226
Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
If the Engine Won’t Start
224
WIRE SUPPORT RING
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４５：２７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２２９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
areOK,thereisprobably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
on page .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
(see page ). You can then try
jump starting the vehicle from a
booster battery (see page ).
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page ).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
154
77
238
214
226
233
238
IftheEngineWon’tStart
Emergency Towing
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
Emergency
Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
225
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４５：３６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２３０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
You cannot start your vehicle with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
Turn off all the electrical
accessories: heater, A/C (if
equipped), audio system, lights,
etc. Put the transmission in neutral
(manual) or Park (automatic), and
set the parking brake.
1.
2.
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
Jump Starting
226
BOOSTER BATTERY
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４５：４３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２３１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋
＋
−
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive ( ) terminal on the
booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the stay as shown. Do
not connect this jumper cable to
any other part of the engine.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
227
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４５：５０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２３２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
The high temperature indicator
should be off under most conditions.
If the engine coolant temperature
gets higher than normal, the
indicator will blink. If it stays on, you
should determine the reason (hot
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indicationmaybethehigh
temperature indicator blinking or
remaining on. Or you may see steam
or spray coming from under the
hood.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
check the high temperature
indicator. If the high heat is due to
overloading, the engine should
start to cool down almost
immediately. If it does, wait until
the high temperature indicator
goes off, then continue driving.
If the high temperature indicator
stays on, turn off the engine.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in neutral
(manual) or Park (automatic), and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
1.
2.
3.
4.
IftheEngineOverheats
228
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the high temperature
indicator on can cause serious damage
to your engine.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４５：５６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２３３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
Start the engine, and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum heat. Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the high
temperature indicator goes off
before checking the radiator.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the high temperature indicator. If
it begins to blink or comes on
again, the engine needs repair
(see on page
).
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
9.
8.
7.
6.
5.
10.
11.
238
238
Emergency
Towing
Emergency Towing
IftheEngineOverheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
229
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４６：０４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２３４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the
battery is not being charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
1.
2.
4.
3.
139
187
238
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator
Emergency Towing
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
230
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４６：１４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２３５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the malfunction
indicator lamp may also come on
with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on
the information display. Tighten the
cap until it clicks at least once.
Tightening the cap will not turn the
indicator off immediately; it can take
several days of normal driving.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may go off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
these codes are erased. It takes at
least three days of driving under
various conditions to set the codes
again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to for
more information (see page ).254
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Readiness Codes Emissions Testing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
231
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４６：２１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２３６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see
on page ).
If the ABS indicator comes on with
the brake system indicator, have
your vehicle inspected by your
dealer immediately.The brake system indicator (red)
normallycomesonwhenyouturn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and as a reminder to check
the parking brake. It will stay on if
you do not fully release the parking
brake.
If the brake system indicator (red)
comes on while driving, the brake
fluid level is probably low. Press
lightly on the brake pedal to see if it
feels normal. If it does, check the
brake fluid level the next time you
stop at a service station (see page
).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads/shoes.
195 238
Emergency
Towing
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
Brake System Indicator
232
U.S.
Canada
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４６：２９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２３７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
threefuseboxes.
The primary under-hood fuse box is
in the engine compartment on the
driver’s side. To open it, push the
tabs as shown.The interior fuse box is behind the
driver’s coin tray. To access it,
removethetraybyturningthedial
counterclockwise then pulling it
toward you. To install the coin tray,
line up the tabs on the bottom, pivot
the tray up to engage its side clips,
then turn the dial clockwise.
The secondary fuse box is on the
positive terminal of the battery.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
233
TAB
INTERIOR
DIAL
UNDER-HOOD UNDER-HOOD
(On Battery)
DRIVER’S COIN TRAY
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４６：３６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２３８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, check for a
blown fuse first. Determine from the
chart on pages and , or the
diagram on the fuse box lid, which
fuse or fuses control that device.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device
works.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse boxes by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
Check the smaller fuses in the
primary under-hood fuse box and
all the fuses in the interior fuse
box by pulling out each one with
the fuse puller provided in the
interior fuse box.
3.1.
2.
4.
236 237
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
234
FUSE
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４６：４４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２３９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
oneofthesparefusesofthesame
rating or lower.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code
(see page ).
6.
5.
128
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
235
BLOWN
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４６：５１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２４０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊＊
No. Circuits Protected
No.
Amps.
Amps. Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Back Up Light
Not Used
METER
Turn Light
Not Used
Front Wipers
SRS
Daytime Running Light
Rear Defogger
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
10 A
10 A
10 A
30 A
10 A
(7.5 A)
20 A
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
15 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
(7.5 A)
(10 A)
(20 A)
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
(20 A)
20 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
HAC
Fuel Pump
Rear Wiper
SRS
IGP
Left Rear Power Window
Right Rear Power Window
Right Front Power Window
TPMS
Daytime Running Light
Not Used
Not Used
Fog Light
Small Light
LAF
Not Used
ABS
Radio
ACC Socket
Power Door Lock
Driver’s Power Window
Not Used
LAF
DBW
Ignition Coil
1 : If equipped 2 : Canadian models
2
1
2
1
1
Fuse Locations
236
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４６：５７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２４１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
No.
Amps. Circuits Protected
No. Amps.Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
80 A Battery
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
30 A
30 A
30 A
20 A
20 A
10 A
30 A
15 A
80 A
60 A
50 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
(30 A)
10 A
Battery
EPS
Ignition
ABS
Blower Relay
Power Window
(HAC Option)
Back Up
Small Light
Cooling Fan
Condenser Fan, MG Clutch
Right Headlight
Left Headlight
Hazard
ABS F/S
Horn, Stop
: If equipped
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
237
Primary Fuse Box
PRIMARY
Secondary Fuse Box (On the battery)
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOXES
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４７：０５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２４２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck.
Therearetwowaystotowyour
vehicle:
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to neutral.
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front) and lift them
off the ground. The other two tires
remain on the ground.
Start the engine.
Release the parking brake.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
With the front wheels on the ground,
do not tow the vehicle more than 50
miles (80 km), and keep the speed
below 35 mph (55 km/h).
Shift to D position and hold for 5
seconds, then to N. Let the engine
runfor3minutes,thenturnitoff.
Turn off the engine.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Manual transmission:
Automatic transmission:
Flat-bed Equipment
Wheel-lift Equipment
This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.
This is an
acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.
Emergency Towing
238
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle must be transported with the
f ront wheels of f the ground.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４７：１６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２４３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see page ).
For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchor in the front bumper.
To use the towing hook:
Take the towing hook and the
extension out of the tool kit in the
cargo area.
Lift the upper part of the cover
from the bumper by pushing the
lower part with your finger. Put a
cloth into the space behind the
upper part of the cover. Using the
extension, remove the cover fully.
1.
2.
238
CONTINUED
Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Taking Care of the Unexpected
239
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４７：２４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２４４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Screw the towing hook into the
bolt hole behind the bumper, then
tighten the hook securely with the
extension.
3.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
240
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
the towing hook f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４７：２９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２４５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 242
................................Specifications . 244
DOT Tire Quality Grading
......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 246
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 246
.................................Treadwear . 246
......................................Traction . 246
.............................Temperature . 247
.................................Tire Labeling . 248
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Required Federal
............................Explanation . 249
.......................Emissions Controls . 251
.....................The Clean Air Act . 251
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 251
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 251
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 251
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 252
....................PGM-FI System . 252
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 252
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 252
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 252
....................Replacement Parts . 252
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 253
........................Emissions Testing . 254
Technical Information
Technical Information
241
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４７：３２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２４６
2008 Fit
Main Menu
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
seeitbylookingthroughthe
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
Identification Numbers
242
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４７：３６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２４７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
The engine number is stamped into
the front of the engine block.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
243
ENGINE NUMBER
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４７：４１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２４８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
244
Dimensions
Weights
Engine
Seating Capacities
Capacities
157.4 in (3,999 mm)Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
66.2 in (1,682 mm)
60.0 in (1,524 mm)
96.5 in (2,450 mm)
57.3 in (1,456 mm)
57.1 in (1,451 mm)
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
0.11 US gal (0.4
)
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
10.8 US gal (41
)
3.8 US qt (3.6
)
4.8 US qt (4.5
)
2.6 US qt (2.5
)
1.7 US qt (1.6
)
1.6 US qt (1.5
)
6.3 US qt (6.0
)
2.5 US qt (2.4
)
1.43 US gal (5.4
)
1.00 US gal (3.8
)
1.40 US gal (5.3
)
0.98 US gal (3.7
)
3.6 US qt (3.4 )
4.4 US qt (4.2
)
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
SKJ20DR-M13
IZFR6K-13
10.4 : 1
91.3 cu-in (1,497 cm
)
2.87 x 3.52 in (73.0 x 89.4 mm)
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC
VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine
5
2
3
Total
Front
Rear
Fuel tank
Engine oil
Engine
coolant
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Manual
transmission
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
Approx.
Front
Rear
1:
2:
(NGK)
(DENSO)
Change
Including filter
Without filter
Total
Automatic
Transmission
Manual
Transmission
Change
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
U.S. Vehicles
Canada
Vehicles
1
2
2
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４７：５８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２４９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
−
＊
＊
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
Technical Information
245
Air Conditioning
Battery
Lights
Fuses
Tires
Alignment
HFC-134a (R-134a)
14.1 15.9 oz (400 450 g)
SP-10
12 V
12 V
60/55 W
21 W
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
21 W
5W
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
Capacity
12 V
Headlights
Front turn signal lights
Parking lights/side marker
lights
Fog lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Ceiling light
Cargo area Light
Taillights
High-mount brake light
8W
3CP
21 W
21/5 W
21 W
5W
55 W
3CP
Interior
Under-hood
0.0in(0mm)
0.10 in (2.5 mm)
0°
1°30’
3°45’
Size
Pressure
P175/65R14 81S
P195/55R15 84H
T115/70D14 88M
T125/70D14 93M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
12 V 40 AH/20 HR
34 AH/5 HR12 V
12 V 32 AH/5 HR
See page 236 or the fuse label
attached to the back of the driver’s
coin tray.
See page 237 or the fuse box
cover.
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
High/Low
(Amber)
1:
2:
(HB2)
(Amber)
(H11)
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
All models except Sport
Sport model
(Amber)
1
2
2
1
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４８：２２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２５０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear Traction
246
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４８：３０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２５１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature
Technical Information
247
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４８：３４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２５２
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Below is an example of
tire size with an explanation of what
each component means.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Rim diameter in inches.
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202
P
195
55
R
15
84
H
Tire Labeling
Tire Identification Number (TIN)Tire Size
248
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
(1) Tire Size
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Pressure
(2)
(3)
Maximum Tire Load(4)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(1)
(3)
DOT B97R FW6X 2202P195/55R15 84H
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４８：５０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２５３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Max Press The maximum air
pressurethetirecanhold.
Max Load The maximum load the
tire can carry at maximum air
pressure.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
CONTINUED
Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Required Federal
Explanation
Technical Information
249
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４９：００ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２５４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
250
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４９：０５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２５５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
251
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４９：１３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２５６
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection. It has three
subsystems: air intake, engine
control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM) in
automatic transmission vehicles or
the engine control module (ECM) in
manual transmission vehicles uses
various sensors to determine how
much air is going into the engine. It
then controls how much fuel to inject
under all operating conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
2
2
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
Emissions Controls
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
252
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４９：２２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２５７
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
253
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４９：２８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２５８
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic transmission) or
neutral (manual transmission).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm,andholditthereuntilthe
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4ofthescale(about3minutes).
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Testing of Readiness Codes
Emissions Testing
254
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４９：３６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２５９
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do
notusethecruisecontrol.When
traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
7. 8.
9.
Emissions Testing
Technical Information
255
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４９：４１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２６０
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
256
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４９：４３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２６１
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
....Customer Service Information . 258
....................Warranty Coverages . 259
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 260
.....................Authorized Manuals . 261
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
257
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４９：４６ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２６２
2008 Fit
Main Menu
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
us this information:
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
242
Customer Service Information
258
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Customer Relations
０７／０６／２８ ２０：４９：５８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２６３
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
this warranty gives up
to 100 % credit toward a replacement
battery.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2008 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2008 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Warranty Coverages
Warranty and Customer Relations
259
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５０：０８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２６４
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
VehicleSafetyHotlinetoll-freeat
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from .
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
260
http://www.saf ercar.gov
http://www.saf ercar.gov
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５０：１２ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２６５
2008 Fit
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
Authorized Manuals
261
Form Description
2008 Honda Fit Service Manual
2008 Honda Fit
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2008 Honda Fit Body Repair Manual
2008 Honda Fit Owner’s Manual
2008 Honda Fit Honda Service History
2008 Honda Fit Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
Publication
Form Number
61SAA01
61SAA01EL
61SAA30
31SAA610
31SAAM10
31SAAQ10
HON-R
www. helminc. com
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５０：２０ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２６６
2008 Fit
Main Menu
262
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５０：２３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２６７
2008 Fit
Main Menu
CONTINUED
....................................Accessories . 144
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 78
...............Accessory Power Socket . 99
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 188
.......Adjusting the Steering Wheel . 75
...........................Advanced Airbags . 27
...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 22
..............Air Conditioning System . 102
.........................................Usage . 103
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 210
.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 136
......................................Antifreeze . 190
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 62, 168
...................................Operation . 168
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 128
.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 78
................................Audio System . 107
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 20
.............Automatic Speed Control . 131
..............Automatic Transmission . 157
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 244
...............Checking Fluid Level . 193
..........................Paddle Shifters . 162
.......................................Shifting . 157
Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 157
................Shift Lever Positions . 158
....................Shift Lock Release . 161
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 127
............................Capacities Chart . 244
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 53
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 60, 230
............................Jump Starting . 226
..............................Maintenance . 214
............................Specifications . 245
..............................Before Driving . 135
....................................Belts,Seat .8,18
...........................Beverage Holders . 98
..................................Booster Seats . 50
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 168
.............Break-in, New Linings . 136
....................Bulb Replacement . 201
...........................................Fluid . 195
.........................................Parking . 96
.................System Indicator . 60, 232
..........................System Design . 167
........................Wear Indicators . 167
.............................Braking System . 167
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 136
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 74
..................Brights, Headlights . 72, 73
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 201
..............................Brake Lights . 201
Front Parking Lights/
...Front Side Marker Lights . 198
.................................Fog Lights . 199
.................................Headlights . 196
.........High-mount Brake Light . 202
............................Specifications . 245
....................................Taillights . 201
............Turn Signal Lights . 198, 201
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 196
Index
A
B
C
INDEX
I
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５０：２８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２６８
2008 Fit
Main Menu
＊
＊＊
＊＊
..............................................Cargo . 146
....................Cargo, How to Carry . 146
.............................Carrying Cargo . 146
.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii
.........................................CD Care . 124
.....................CD Error Messages . 123
.......................................CD Player . 114
.................................Center Pocket . 97
........................Certification Label . 242
.................................Chains, Tires . 214
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 219
.................................Changing Oil . 188
........................................How to . 188
......................................When to . 179
...Charging System Indicator . 60, 230
..............Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 68
............Checklist, Before Driving . 153
.....................................Child Safety . 34
..............................Booster Seats . 50
.............................Child Seats . 34, 41
.....Important Safety Reminders . 34
..........................................Infants . 39
............................Large Children . 49
.........................................LATCH . 43
......................Risks with Airbags . 35
.............................Small Children . 40
.........................................Tethers . 47
...........................Warning Labels . 36
.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 35
.................................Child Seats . 34, 41
.........................................LATCH . 43
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 47
..................Childproof Door Locks . 80
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 203
....................Cleaning the Wheels . 208
..............................................Clock . 129
...................................Clutch Fluid . 195
........................CO in the Exhaust . 251
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 154
...............Consumer Information . 258
.............Controls, Instruments and . 57
Coolant
........................................Adding . 190
....................................Checking . 140
.........................Proper Solution . 190
...............Temperature Indicator . 63
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 251
................Cruise Control Indicator . 65
............Cruise Control Operation . 131
.....................................Cup Holders . 98
.............Customer Service Office . 258
...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii
...................................Dashboard . 3, 58
............Daytime Running Lights . 73
Daytime Running Lights
...................................Indicator . 65
.................................Dead Battery . 226
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 260
................Defogger, Rear Window . 74
..............Defrosting the Windows . 105
.........................Detachable Anchor . 93
....................................Dimensions . 244
.........Dimming the Headlights . 72, 73
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 193
..................................Engine Oil . 139
..........................Directional Signals . 72
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 167
.......................................Disc Care . 124
.......Disc Player Error Messages . 123
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 189
Doors
..............Childproof Door Locks . 80
..............Locking and Unlocking . 79
......................Power Door Locks . 79
Index
D
II
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５０：３３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２６９
2008 Fit
Main Menu
＊
CONTINUED
........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 246
Downshifting, Manual
.............................Transmission . 155
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 151
....................................Economy . 141
........................Driving Guidelines . 152
Driving with the Paddle
.......................................Shifters . 162
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 205
..............................Economy, Fuel . 141
..................................Emergencies . 217
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 226
...........Brake System Indicator . 232
................Changing a Flat Tire . 219
.....Charging System Indicator . 230
..................Checking the Fuses . 234
.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 74
............................Jump Starting . 226
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 230
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 231
..................Overheated Engine . 228
.......................................Towing . 238
...........................Emergency Brake . 96
......................Emergency Flashers . 74
......................Emergency Towing . 238
.......................Emissions Controls . 251
........................Emissions Testing . 254
Engine
............Adding Engine Coolant . 190
Coolant Temperature
...................................Indicator . 63
.........................If It Won’t Start . 224
Malfunction Indicator
......................................Lamp . 231
.......................................Oil Life . 179
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 230
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 187
...............................Overheating . 228
............................Specifications . 244
....................Speed Limiter . 156, 160
.......................................Starting . 154
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 136
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 251
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 53
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 16
...................................Fan, Interior . 103
.........................................Features . 101
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 137
Filters
.........................Dust and Pollen . 205
...............................................Oil . 188
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 74
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 219
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 193
..........................................Brake . 195
.........................................Clutch . 195
..............Manual Transmission . 194
..................Windshield Washer . 192
.........Folding the Rear Seat Down . 91
...............Folding the Rear Seat Up . 90
..........................Four-way Flashers . 74
..............................Front Airbags . 9, 25
Front Seat
......................................Adjusting . 86
.....................................Airbags . 9, 25
Index
E
F
INDEX
III
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５０：３８ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２７０
2008 Fit
Main Menu
＊＊
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 141
..........................................Gasohol . 136
.........................................Gasoline . 136
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 62
...........................................Gauge . 68
................Octane Requirement . 136
........................Tank, Refueling . 137
................Gas Station Procedures . 137
Gauges
...............................................Fuel . 68
Gearshift Lever Positions
..........Automatic Transmission . 158
..............Manual Transmission . 155
........................................Glove Box . 98
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
.....................................(GVWR) . 148
.................................................Fuel . 136
..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 68
......................Fill Door and Cap . 137
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 62
...........................................Gauge . 68
................Octane Requirement . 136
...............................Oxygenated . 136
........................Tank, Refueling . 137
...............................Fuel Economy . 141
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 234
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 196
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 74
Headlights
........................................Aiming . 196
.......Daytime Running Lights . 73
..................High Beam Indicator . 65
.........................Reminder Chime . 73
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 196
...................................Turning on . 73
..............................Head Restraints . 87
.....................Heating and Cooling . 102
............................High Beam Lever . 73
.......................Hood, Opening the . 138
..............................................Horn .4,70
...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 195
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 242
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 76
...........................................Switch . 78
............Timing Control System . 252
........................Immobilizer System . 77
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
Index
G
H
I
IV
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５０：４３ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２７１
2008 Fit
Main Menu
＊＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
..................................................Keys . 76
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 221
.......................................Jack, Tire . 219
................................Jump Starting . 226
.......................Label, Certification . 242
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 72
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 19
...........LATCH Anchorage System . 43
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 196
.......................................Indicator . 59
.........................................Parking . 72
..................................Turn Signal . 72
....................................Load Limits . 147
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 78
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 78
..........................Childproof Door . 80
.................................Power Door . 79
........................................Tailgate . 81
........................Low Coolant Level . 140
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 62
Indicators
......ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 62, 168
Brake (Parking and Brake
............................System) . 60, 232
................Charging System . 60, 230
...........................Check Fuel Cap . 68
.............................Cruise Control . 65
............Door and Tailgate Open . 62
DRL (Daytime Running
..................................Lights) . 65
.EPS (Electric Power Steering) . 62
.....................................Fog Light . 64
...................................High Beam . 65
......................High Temperature . 63
........Key (Immobilizer System) . 66
.....................................Lights On . 64
......................................Low Fuel . 62
................Low Oil Pressure . 60, 230
.......................Low Temperature . 63
............Low Tire Pressure . 64, 170
..........Maintenance Minder . 66, 179
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 231
.................Passenger Airbag Off . 31
..............Seat Belt Reminder . 18, 60
..........................Security System . 66
.....................Side Airbag Off . 31, 61
.........................................SRS . 30, 61
.................................TPMS . 64, 171
Turn Signal and Hazard
...................................Warning . 63
..............................Washer Level . 65
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 59
...............................Infant Restraint . 39
......................................Infant Seats . 39
............Tether Anchorage Point . 47
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 209
........Recommended Pressures . 210
...................................Inside Mirror . 95
.............................Inspection, Tire . 210
....................Installing a Child Seat . 42
............................Instrument Panel . 59
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 74
..............Instruments and Controls . 57
.................................Interior Lights . 99
........................................Introduction . i
Index
L
K
J
INDEX
V
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５０：４９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２７２
2008 Fit
Main Menu
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 230
................................Lower Anchors . 43
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 244
...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 146
...........Luggage Net (Cargo Net) . 150
..................................Maintenance . 177
......Main Items and Sub Items . 182
........................................Minder . 179
.........................Minder Indicator . 66
Owner’s Maintenance
...................................Checks . 184
..........................................Safety . 178
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 231
...................Manual Transmission . 155
...............Checking Fluid Level . 194
.......................................Shifting . 155
........Manual Transmission Fluid . 194
.........................Meters, Gauges . 59, 67
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 136
..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 95
...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 144
...................Neutral Gear Position . 159
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 136
.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 156
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 242
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 136
.........................................Odometer . 68
...............................Odometer, Trip . 67
Oil
........................Change, How to . 188
......................Change, When to . 179
......................Checking Engine . 139
..............Pressure Indicator . 60, 230
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 187
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 78
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 251
..............................Outside Mirrors . 95
....................Overheating, Engine . 228
....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 184
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 136
..............................Paddle Shifters . 162
..............Panel Brightness Control . 74
........................Park Gear Position . 158
...........................................Parking . 166
.................................Parking Brake . 96
Parking Brake and Brake
.................System Indicator . 60, 232
.................................Parking Lights . 72
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 166
....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 31
.............................PGM-FI System . 252
...................................Pollen Filter . 205
..........................Power Door Locks . 79
..................Power Socket Location . 99
..............................Power Windows . 94
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 16
........................Preparing to Drive . 153
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
...Additional Safety Precautions . 17
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16
Index
M
N
P
O
VI
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５０：５５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２７３
2008 Fit
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
........................Protecting Children . 34
.......................Protecting Infants . 39
.......Protecting Larger Children . 49
.........Protecting Small Children . 40
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 47
.............................Using LATCH . 43
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 18
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 260
.................................Safety Features . 7
...........................................Airbags . 9
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 54
..............................Safety Messages . iii
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18
...............Additional Information . 18
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 20
.....................................Cleaning . 203
.....................Detachable Anchor . 93
................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 19
................................Maintenance . 20
Reminder Indicator and
................................Beeper . 18, 60
...................System Components . 18
...............Use During Pregnancy . 16
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14
........................Seats, Adjusting the . 86
.........................Select/Reset Knob . 67
...............................Serial Number . 242
...........................Service Intervals . 179
...........................Service Manual . 261
.........Service Station Procedures . 137
..........................Setting the Clock . 129
...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 157
........................Shift Lock Release . 161
...................Radiator Overheating . 228
.............Radio/CD Sound System . 107
.................Radio Theft Protection . 128
...........................Readiness Codes . 231
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 201
....................Rear Seat, Folding . 90, 91
............................Rear View Mirror . 95
.................Rear Window Defogger . 74
.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 71
...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 87
.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 156
........................................Refueling . 137
.......................Reminder Indicators . 59
.......................Remote Transmitter . 83
Replacement Information
..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 205
................Engine Oil and Filter . 188
..........................................Fuses . 233
................................Light Bulbs . 196
....................................Schedule . 185
...........................................Tires . 212
.............................Wiper Blades . 205
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 21
..........Reporting Safety Defects . 260
Reserve Tank, Engine
...............................Coolant . 140, 190
...............................Restraint, Child . 34
..................Reverse Gear Position . 159
...........................Reverse Lockout . 161
................................Rotation, Tire . 212
Index
INDEX
R
S
VII
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５１：０１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２７４
2008 Fit
Main Menu
＊
−
................................Side Airbags . 9, 28
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 31
..................Side Curtain Airbags . 9, 30
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 30
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
..............................Replacement . 198
...............................Signaling Turns . 72
.....................................Snow Tires . 213
................................Sound System . 107
......................................Spare Tire . 218
....................................Spark Plugs . 244
........................Specifications . 244, 245
................................Speed Control . 131
........................Speed Limiter . 156, 160
..........SRS, Additional Information . 22
...Additional Safety Precautions . 33
.............................Airbag Service . 32
......Airbag System Components . 22
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 31
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 25
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 30
.............................SRS Indicator . 30, 61
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 78
.......................Starting the Engine . 154
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 154
................With a Dead Battery . 226
........Steam Coming from Engine . 228
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 75
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 78
...............Steering Wheel Buttons . 131
...................Stereo Sound System . 107
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 216
..........................................Sun Visor . 99
Supplemental Restraint
..................................System .9,22
......................................Servicing . 32
.........................SRS Indicator . 30, 61
...................System Components . 22
..................................Synthetic Oil . 188
Tailgate
............................Open Indicator . 62
.................................Opening the . 81
..........Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 201
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 217
Technical Descriptions
....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 246
.....Emissions Control Systems . 251
.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 136
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 253
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Required
.........Federal Explanation . 249
...................Temperature Indicator . 63
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 47
................Theft Protection, Radio . 128
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 253
..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 75
..........................Time, Setting the . 129
....................................Tire Chains . 214
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 219
...........................Tire Information . 248
Index
T
VIII
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５１：０５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２７５
2008 Fit
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊＊
...............................................Tires . 208
..............................Air Pressure . 210
........................................Chains . 214
.........................Checking Wear . 210
....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 246
......................................Inflation . 209
..................................Inspection . 210
.....................................Labeling . 248
Low Tire Pressure
.........................Indicator . 64, 170
..............................Maintenance . 211
Pressure Monitoring
..................................System . 170
...................................Replacing . 212
......................................Rotating . 212
...........................................Snow . 213
............................Specifications . 245
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 219
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 173
................Emergency Wrecker . 238
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
................................System) . 170
.............................Indicator . 64, 171
Required Federal
............................Explanation . 249
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
..............................Automatic . 193
Checking Fluid Level,
...................................Manual . 194
..................Fluid Selection . 193, 194
..............Identification Number . 243
.............Shifting the Automatic . 157
..................Shifting the Manual . 155
.....................................Treadwear . 246
.......................................Trip Meter . 67
....................................Turn Signals . 72
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 217
..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 246
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 136
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 189
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 147
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 244
....Vehicle Identification Number . 242
.............................Vehicle Storage . 216
.....................................Ventilation . 104
.................................................VIN . 242
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 187
............WARNING, Explanation of . iii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 54
..................Warranty Coverages . 259
Washers, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 192
..............Fluid Level Indicator . 65
.....................................Operation . 71
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 75
............Alignment and Balance . 212
..........Aluminum Alloy Wheels . 208
.....................................Cleaning . 208
..............................Wrench, Nut . 221
Windows
...................................Auto Down . 94
..................Operating the Power . 94
...........................Rear, Defogger . 74
Index
V
W
U
INDEX
IX
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５１：１１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２７６
2008 Fit
Main Menu
＊＊
＊
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 71
...................................Defroster . 105
.....................................Washers . 192
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 205
.....................................Operation . 71
....................................Worn Tires . 210
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 238
:
:U.S.only
Canada only
Index
X
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５１：１５ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２７７
2008 Fit
Main Menu
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５１：１７ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２７８
2008 Fit
Main Menu
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５１：１９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２７９
2008 Fit
Main Menu
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５１：２１ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２８０
2008 Fit
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Manual Transmission Fluid:
SpareTirePressure:
10.8 US gal (41
)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
3.8 US qt (3.6
)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) (see page
).
Front/Rear:
Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30
or 10W-40 motor oil as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
Capacity (including differential):
1.6 US qt (1.5
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
187
193
194
195
０７／０６／２８ ２０：５１：３４ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０２８１
2008 Fit
Main Menu
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Fit. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular vehicle.
Owner’s Identification
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votreconcessionnairede
commander le numéro de pièce
33SAAC10
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
０７／０６／２８ ２０：１５：３９ ３１ＳＡＡ６１０ ０００１
2008 Fit
Main Menu
